2004 accord 4 door online reference owner's manual...

2004 Accord 4 Door Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com. Contents

Introduction ....................................................................................................................................... i A Few Words About Safety ................................................................................................................ ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ................................................................................................................... 2Driver and Passenger Safety ............................................................................................................ 5 Seat belts, SRS, and child protection.Instruments and Controls ................................................................................................................. 59Indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column.Features .............................................................................................................................................. 109Heating and cooling, audio, steering wheel, and cruise control.Before Driving.................................................................................................................................. 163Fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading.Driving .............................................................................................................................................. 177Engine and transmission operation.Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................... 199Schedules, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage.

Taking Care of the Unexpected ...................................................................................................... 247Flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses.Technical Information..................................................................................................................... 271Vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls.Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ................................................................ 287Warranty and contact information.Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...................................................................................................... 291How to order.Index..................................................................................................................................................... I

Service Information Summary Fluid capacities and tire pressures.

Owner's Identification Form

Information Provided by:

Congratulations! Your selection of a 2004 Honda Accord was a wiseinvestment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Honda is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new Honda. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your Honda, otherproperty, or the environment.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Hondadealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique toyour Honda. Your Honda dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will bepleased to answer any questions and concerns.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

０３／０９／０３　１１：２３：５８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０００２　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


－

－

－－

－

－

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

preceded by a safety alert symbol and one ofthree signal words: , , or .These signal words mean:

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

on the vehicle.

A Few Words About Safety

Safety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

Safety Labels

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

０３／０９／０３　１１：２４：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０００３　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


Your Vehicle at a Glance

2

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLSPOWER DOOR LOCK

SWITCH

MIRROR CONTROLS

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

DASH LIGHTSGAUGES

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE/FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE

(P.62)

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

(P.110)

AUDIO SYSTEM

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

MANUALTRANSMISSION

AIRBAGS (P.9/22)

(P.68)

(P.98)

(P.83)

(P.99)

(P.89/165) (P.166) (P.107)

(P.180)

(P.182)

(P.122)

０３／０９／０３　１１：２４：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０００５　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


＊

＊ Only on vehicles equipped with Navigation System. Refer to the Navigation System Owner’s Manual.:

Your Vehicle at a Glance

3

WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

INSTRUMENT PANELBRIGHTNESS

MOONROOFSWITCH

VOICE CONTROLSWITCHES

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

REMOTE AUDIOCONTROLS

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM HORNSTEERING WHEELADJUSTMENT

HAZARDWARNING LIGHTS

CRUISE CONTROLS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.31)(P.76)

(P.74)

(P.151)

(P.102)

(P.191)(P.78)

(P.77, 113, 116)

(P.155)

(P.76)

(P.73)

０３／０９／０３　１１：２４：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０００６　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work, andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 7

.......................................Seat Belts . 8...........................................Airbags . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 11

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 12............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 13

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 145. Fasten and Position the Lap/

............Shoulder Seat Belts . 14....6. Adjust the Steering Wheel . 16

7. Maintain a Proper Sitting................................Position . 16

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17...Additional Safety Precautions . 18

Additional Information About Your.................................Seat Belts . 19

..Seat Belt System Components . 19......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19

........ 20...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 21

Additional Information About Your.....................................Airbags . 22

......Airbag System Components . 22......... 23

......................Advanced Airbags . 25...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27

How Your Side Curtain Airbags.........................................Work . 28

..How the SRS Indicator Works . 28How the Side Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 29How the Passenger Airbag Off

......................Indicator Works . 31.............................Airbag Service . 32

...Additional Safety Precautions . 33Protecting Children General

................................Guidelines . 34

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 34

All Children Should Sit in the.................................Back Seat . 35

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 35

..........................................Infants . 35.............................Small Children . 35

..........................Larger Children . 35If You Must Drive with Several

...................................Children . 38If a Child Requires Close

..................................Attention . 38...Additional Safety Precautions . 38

Protecting Infants and.........................Small Children . 40.......................Protecting Infants . 40

.........Protecting Small Children . 42......................Selecting Child Seats . 43....................Installing a Child Seat . 45

Installing a Child Seat Using.....................................LATCH . 46

...........Protecting Larger Children . 51...Additional Safety Precautions . 55

.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56...................................Safety Labels . 57

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety


5

０３／０９／０３　１１：２４：５４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０００８　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat. Infants and small childrenshould be restrained in a child seat.Larger children should use a boosterand a lap/shoulder belt until they

can use the belt properly without abooster (see page ). Excessive speed is a major factor in

crash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbagssupplement seat belts, but airbagsare designed to inflate only in amoderate to severe frontal collision.So even though your vehicle isequipped with airbags, make sureyou and your passengers alwayswear your seat belts, and wear themproperly (see page ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

14

34

201

Important Safety Precautions


Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Don’t Drink and Drive

6

０３／０９／０３　１１：２５：０７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０００９　

Main Menu Table of Contents ▲ ▼


＊

＊

＊

Some safety features do not requireany action on your part. Theseinclude a strong steel frameworkthat forms a safety cage around thepassenger compartment; front andrear crush zones, a collapsiblesteering column, and seat belttensioners that tighten the front seatbelts in the event of a crash.However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesesafety features unless you remainsitting in a proper position andalways wear your seat belts properly.In fact, some safety features cancontribute to injuries if they are notused properly.

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.


Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

7

(1)

(2)

(2)

(3) (4)

(5)

(6)(7)

(8)

(7)

(10)

(11)

(9)(8)

(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Seat Belt Tensioners

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column

: If equipped

０３／０９／０３　１１：２５：１５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００１０　



Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system alsoincludes a light on the

instrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats).

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts: Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag, andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts


8

０３／０９／０３　１１：２５：２９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００１１　



CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a SupplementalRestraint System (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision (see page

for more information on howyour front airbags work).

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the upper torso of thedriver or a front seat passengerduring a moderate to severe sideimpact (see page for moreinformation on how your side airbagswork).

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.

23 27

Optional on the U.S. LX modelStandard on V-6 and EX models.


AirbagsWhat You Should Do:


9

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, evenif you have airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassenger always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

０３／０９／０３　１１：２５：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００１２　



Your vehicle also has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions (see page for moreinformation on how your side curtainairbags work).

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives they cancause minor injuries, or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright, and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.

28

U.S. EX-L model, optional on U.S. EXmodel and Canadian EX-V6 model


Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.


10

０３／０９／０３　１１：２５：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００１３　



－

Your vehicle has a door monitor lighton the instrument panel to indicatewhen a specific door is not tightlyclosed.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

See page for how to lock thedoors, and page for how themonitor light works.

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adult passengers,and teenage children who are largeenough and mature enough to ride inthe front. See pages forimportant guidelines on how toproperly protect infants, smallchildren, and larger children whoride in your vehicle.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

After everyone has entered the car,be sure the doors are closed andlocked.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in severecrashes, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

55

64

34

83


Protecting Adults and Teens

Introduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

11

０３／０９／０３　１１：２６：００　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００１４　



Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See pages and for how toadjust the front seats.

92 93



Adjust the Front Seats2.

12

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

０３／０９／０３　１１：２６：１１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００１５　



Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

See pages and for how toadjust the seat-backs.

92 93



Adjust the Seat-Backs3.

13

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

０３／０９／０３　１１：２６：２０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００１６　



Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Also checkthat the belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablerestraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

94



Fasten and Position the Lap/Shoulder Seat Belts

Adjust the Head Restraints4. 5.

14

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

０３／０９／０３　１１：２６：３０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００１７　



Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.This spreads the forces of a crash

over the strongest bones in yourupper body.If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

If a seat belt does not seem to workas it should, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your Honda dealer check thebelt as soon as possible.See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

To adjust the height of a front seatbelt anchor, press the release buttonand slide the anchor up or down asneeded (the anchor has fourpositions).

19

CONTINUED



Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.

15

RELEASEBUTTONS

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

０３／０９／０３　１１：２６：４１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００１８　



Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,so that the wheel points toward yourchest, not toward your face. Thisprovides optimal protection from thefront airbag.

See page for how to adjust thesteering wheel.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

78



Adjust the Steering Wheel Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6. 7.

16

０３／０９／０３　１１：２６：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００１９　



In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag. Being struckby an inflating side airbag canpossibly result in serious injuries.

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a check-up, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.If you are pregnant, the best way to

protect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.



Advice for Pregnant Women

17

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

０３／０９／０３　１１：２７：００　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００２０　



If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe seat belt and increase thechance of serious injury in a crash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp objects inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the front airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

This could make the driver’s seatposition sensor or the frontpassenger’s seat weight sensorsineffective.

This could causeproblems with the driver’s seatposition sensor or the frontpassenger’s seat weight sensors.

This could make the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective. Make sure the rightrear floor mat is hooked over thefloor mat anchor (see page ).235



Additional Safety Precautions

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

On models with side airbags, donot attach hard objects on or neara front door.

Do not modify the front seats.

Do not place any items under thefront seats.

Do not place the right rear floormat under the front passenger’sseat.

18

０３／０９／０３　１１：２７：１０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００２１　



Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners.

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.The seat belt system

includes a light on theinstrument panel to remind you andyour passengers to fasten your seatbelts.

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) without fastening your seat belt,a beeper will sound and the light willblink. The beeper will stop afterseveral seconds.

If you do not fasten your seat beltbefore the beeper stops, theindicator light will stop blinking butremain lit. If you continue drivingwithout fastening your seat belt, theindicator will come on and thebeeper will sound at regular intervals.

The lap and shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

To unlock the belt, push the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

15

48

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts


Seat Belt System Components Lap/Shoulder Belt

19

０３／０９／０３　１１：２７：２３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００２２　



If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle, andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the belt, pull it out only asfar as needed.

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The tensioners are designed toactivate primarily in frontal collisions,and they should activate in anycollision severe enough to causefront-airbag inflation.

However, the tensioners can beactivated during a collision in whichthe front airbags do not deploy. Inthis case, the airbags would not beneeded, but the additional restraintcould be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.



Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

20

０３／０９／０３　１１：２７：３３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００２３　



For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. Any belt thatis not in good condition or notworking properly will not providegood protection and should bereplaced as soon as possible.

Honda provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For information on how to clean yourseat belts, see page .235

Honda Warranty Information



Seat Belt Maintenance

21

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

０３／０９／０３　１１：２７：４３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００２４　



Your airbag system includes:Two SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

On models equipped with two sideairbags, one for the driver and onefor a front passenger. The airbagsare stored in the outer edges ofthe seat-backs. Both are marked‘‘SIDE AIRBAG’’ (see page ).

On models equipped with two sidecurtain airbags, one for each sideof the vehicle. The airbags arestored in the front, center, andrear pillars. The front and centerpillars on both sides are marked‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (seepage ).28

27

Additional Information About Your Airbags


Airbag System Components

22

(1)

(3)

(7)

(6) (5)

(4)(10)

(9)

(2)(8) (6)

(5)

(10) (11) (4)

(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front passenger’s Airbag(3) CONTROL UNIT(4) Seat Belt Tensioners(5) Side Airbags(6) Front Impact Sensors(7) OPDS Sensor/Seat-back(8) Passenger’s Airbag Off Indicator(9) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors(10) Side Impact Sensors(11) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor

０３／０９／０３　１１：２７：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００２５　



Front passenger’s weight sensorsthat monitor the weight on theseat. These prevent the passenger’sairbag from inflating if the weightis less than about 65 lbs (30 kg)(see page ).

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration. If the rate ofdeceleration is high enough, thecontrol unit will instantly inflate thedriver’s and front passenger’s frontairbags, at the time and with theforce needed.

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe frontal impactor side impact in models equippedwith side airbags.

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, and driver andpassenger seat belt use when theignition is ON (II).

An indicator light on theinstrument panel that alerts you toa possible problem with yourairbags (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the seat position. If theseat is too far forward, the airbagwill inflate with less force (seepage ).

20

26

63

26

31

CONTINUED


How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver and Passenger Safety 23

０３／０９／０３　１１：２８：０６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００２６　



During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the airbag helps protect yourhead and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

After inflating, the front airbagsimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

Only the driver’s airbag can deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).31


Driver and Passenger Safety24

０３／０９／０３　１１：２８：１６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００２７　



Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to prevent airbag-causedinjuries to short drivers and childrenwho ride in front.

For the advanced airbag to workproperly, occupants must sit uprightand wear their seat belts properly. Ifa child seat is installed in the front, itmust be properly secured.

It the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at the samethreshold as a conventional airbag,because the occupant would needextra protection.

In addition, do not spill any liquids,cover the sensors, or put any cargoor metal objects under the frontseats. Ask rear seat passengers tonot put their feet under the frontseats. Any of these actions coulddamage the sensors or prevent themfrom working properly.

CONTINUED



Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

Dual-Threshold Airbags

latched

not latched

Advanced Airbags

25

０３／０９／０３　１１：２８：２８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００２８　



The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat ispositioned too far forward, theairbag will inflate sequentially,regardless of the severity of theimpact.

If there is a problem with the seatposition sensor, the SRS indicator inthe instrument will come on in theinstrument panel. In this case, thedriver’s airbag will inflate in the

normal manner during a crashregardless of the driver’s seatingposition.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. If sensors detect atotal weight on the seat of about 65lbs (30 kg) or less, the system willautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off.

When the airbag is turned off, a lightin the center of the dashboard willcome on indicating ‘‘PassengerAirbag Off’’ (see page ).

If there is no passenger in the frontseat, the but theindicator .

31



airbag will be offlight will not come on

26

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

０３／０９／０３　１１：２８：３６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００２９　



Only on models equipped with sideairbags

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of thepassenger’s seat.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

Make sure the rear floor mat ishooked to the floor mat anchor. Ifnot, the floor mat will prevent theseat operation and the sensorsmay not work properly. Only one airbag will deploy during a

side impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’s

side airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.The passenger’s side airbag has acutoff system designed to turn offthe passenger’s side airbag if a child’shead is in the airbag’s deploymentpath (see page ).

If the side airbag off indicator lightcomes on, have the passenger situpright. Once the passenger is out ofthe deployment path of the sideairbag, the system will turn theairbag back on and the light will goout.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

31



How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

27

０３／０９／０３　１１：２８：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００３０　



The SRS indicator lightalerts you to a potential

problem with your front airbags, sideairbags, side curtain airbags, frontseat belt tensioners, or the driver’sseat position sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensors (seepages and ).

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle. If theimpact is on the passenger’s side, thepassenger’s side curtain airbag willinflate even if there are no occupantson that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

Your vehicle is equipped with sidecurtain airbags. These airbags arestored in the front, center, and rearpillars on both sides. The front andrear pillars on both sides are marked‘‘SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.’’

On models with side airbags, thisindicator will also alert you to apotential problem with your sideairbags, the passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system (see page

), or the side curtain airbags.

When you turn the ignition ON (II),this indicator will light briefly thengo out. This tells you that the systemis working properly.

26 31

29

(On models equipped)

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator LightWorks



SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

０３／０９／０３　１１：２９：０１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００３１　



If the light comes on at any othertime, or does not come on at all, youshould have the system checked byyour dealer. For example:

If the SRS indicator light does notcome on after you turn the ignitionON (II).

If the light stays on after theengine starts.

If the light comes on or flashes onand off while you drive.

This light alerts you thatthe passenger’s side airbag

has been automatically shut off. Itdoes mean there is a problemwith your side airbags.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and the seat belttensioners may not work properlywhen you need them.

(On models equipped)

CONTINUED

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Light Works



not

29

Ignoring the SRS indicator lightcan result in serious injury ordeath if the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your car checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS light alerts you to apossible problem.

０３／０９／０３　１１：２９：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００３２　



Although Honda does not encouragechildren to ride in front, this systemis designed to shut off the sideairbag if a child leans sideways andthe child’s head is in the side airbagdeployment path.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the indicator should lightbriefly and go out (see page ). If itdoesn’t light, stays on, or comes onwhile driving without a passenger inthe front seat, have the systemchecked.

If a short adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the side airbagdeployment path, the system mayalso shut off the side airbag.

63



０３／０９／０３　１１：２９：１８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００３３　



This light alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off. It does not mean there is aproblem with the airbag.

To reduce the chance of airbag-caused injuries, the system shuts offthe passenger’s front airbag whenthe total weight on the frontpassenger’s seat is about 65 lbs(30 kg) or less.

If no one is riding in the frontpassenger’s seat, the airbag will beautomatically shut off, but theindicator light will not come on.

However, if the light comes on withno passenger in the front, or with anadult in the seat, there may be aproblem with the advanced airbagsystem. Have the vehicle checked bythe dealer as soon as possible.

The Passenger Airbag Off indicatormay also come on and off repeatedlyif total weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold (65 lbs or 30kg).

If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in a backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, have the passengersit upright and wear the seat beltproperly.

This indicator may come on and offrepeatedly if objects are placed onthe front passenger’s seat, or if theinterior temperature of the vehiclechanges suddenly when a door isopened.

See page for more informationabout the passenger’s advancedfront airbag.

26

How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Light Works



PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

０３／０９／０３　１１：２９：２９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００３４　



Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance-free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by a Honda dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle toan authorized Honda dealer assoon as possible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensors tomake sure they are operatingproperly.



Airbag Service An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator light alerts youto a problem.

If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

32

０３／０９／０３　１１：２９：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００３５　



Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

If water or another liquidsoaks into a seat-back, it canprevent the side airbag cutoffsystem from working properly.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact AmericanHonda at 800-999-1009.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor andthe front passenger’s weightsensors ineffective.

This could make the frontpassenger’s weight sensorsineffective. Make sure the rightrear floor mat is hooked over thefloor mat anchor (see page ).

Improperlyreplacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your sideairbags from inflating during aside impact.

Pushing orpulling on the back of the seat,placing heavy items in the backseat pocket, pushing cargo againstthe seat, or hanging heavy itemson the seat back can interfere withthe proper operation of thepassenger’s advanced front airbag.

235



Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not expose the front seat-backsto liquid.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting a Hondadealer.

Do not place any items under thefront seats.

Do not place the right rear floormat under the front passenger’sseat.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consulting aHonda dealer.

Do not do anything that wouldincrease or decrease weight on thefront passenger’s seat.

33

０３／０９／０３　１１：２９：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００３６　



－

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions many adults do not knowhow to properly protect childpassengers.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian providence requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

If you have children, or if you everneed to drive with a child in yourvehicle, be sure to read this section.It begins with important generalguidelines, then presents specialinformation for infants, smallchildren, and larger children.


All Children Must Be Restrained

Protecting Children General Guidelines

34

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster if necessary.

０３／０９／０３　１１：２９：５４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００３７　



－

－

－

－

(see pages ).

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating airbag when they ride in theback.

(see pages ).

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in theback seat. The National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration andTransport Canada recommend thatall children age 12 and under beproperly restrained in the back seat.

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do thisthe passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

To help prevent airbag-causedinjuries to children, this vehicle hasan advanced airbag system.

With this system, the frontpassenger’s airbag is turned off ifsensors detect a total weight of lessthan about 65 lbs (30 kg) on the seat(see pages for additionalinformation about how the frontpassenger’s advanced airbag works).

Even if the passenger’s front airbagis turned off, we stronglyrecommend that children age 12 andunder ride properly restrained in aback seat where they will be safer.

40 50

5551

25 26

CONTINUED

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicleLarger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster until the seat belt f its themproperly

All Children Should Sit in theBack Seat

The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks



35

０３／０９／０３　１１：３０：０５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００３８　



－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin the back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard andon the driver’s and front passenger’svisors. Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.


U.S. Models


36

０３／０９／０３　１１：３０：１４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００３９　



－

To remind you of the front airbaghazards, your vehicle has warninglabels on the driver’s and frontpassenger’s visors. Please read andfollow the instructions on theselabels.


Canadian Models


37

０３／０９／０３　１１：３０：２３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００４０　



－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

If a child requires physical attentionor frequent visual contact, westrongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in the backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

Never hold an infant or child onyour lap. If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child. During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.

16

14

51

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

Additional Safety Precautions



38

０３／０９／０３　１１：３０：３７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００４１　



－

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use. Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren. Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignition,and open the trunk, which canlead to accidental injury or death.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt. If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors. This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle. Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous. Forexample, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition can accidentally set thevehicle in motion, possibly injuringthemselves or others.



39

０３／０９／０３　１１：３０：４４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００４２　



Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

A rear-facing child seat shouldalways be installed in a back seat, notin the front. Even with advancedairbags, which can automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off(see page ), a back seat is thesafest place for an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theseat-back in the desired position.

In either of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat in a different backseating position or get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

25

Child Seat Type

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Child Seat Placement

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Infants


Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

０３／０９／０３　１１：３０：５６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００４３　



－

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving the seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theseat-back in the desired position.

In any of these situations, westrongly recommend that you installthe child seat in a different backseating position or get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Or, it could push against the front-passenger’s seat-back, interferingwith the proper operation of thepassenger’s advanced front airbag(see page ).2625



０３／０９／０３　１１：３１：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００４４　



We also recommend that a smallchild stay in the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front. Even withadvanced airbags, which canautomatically turn the passenger’sfront airbag off (see page ), aback seat is the safest place for asmall child.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

A child who is at least one year old,and who fits within the child seatmaker’s weight and height limits,should be restrained in a forward-facing, upright child seat.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle, and thechild is properly strapped in the seat.

31

Child Seat Type


Child Seat Placement


Protecting Small Children

42

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

０３／０９／０３　１１：３１：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００４５　



When buying a child seat, you needto choose between a conventionalchild seat, or one designed for usewith the Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH) system.

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

CONTINUED


Selecting a Child Seat

43

０３／０９／０３　１１：３１：１８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００４６　



Whatever type of seat you choose, toprovide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommendthat you test the seat in thespecific vehicle seating position, orpositions, where the seat will beused.

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

2.

3.

1.


Selecting a Child Seat

44

０３／０９／０３　１１：３１：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００４７　



After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid’’. Some side-to-sidemovement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

After selecting a proper child seat,and a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seat.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Secure the child in the child seat.2.

1.

3.

Installing a Child Seat


０３／０９／０３　１１：３１：３４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００４８　



Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (Lower Anchors andTethers for Children) at the outerrear seats. The lower anchors arelocated between the seat-back andseat bottom, and are to be used onlywith a child seat designed for usewith LATCH.

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, and attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connection asshown above.

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat andanchors.

Small marks are positioned toindicate the locations of each anchorpoint.

1.

2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat UsingLATCH



Rigid typeLOWER ANCHOR MARKS

０３／０９／０３　１１：３１：４４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００４９　



Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connection asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Route the tether strap through thelegs of the head restraint, thenhook the strap to the anchoragepoint as shown.

Make sure the strap is not twisted,then tighten the strap according tothe child seat maker’s instruction.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

4.

5.

6.

7.



TETHER STRAP HOOK

Flexible type TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

０３／０９／０３　１１：３１：５４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００５０　



When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inthe back seat and the frontpassenger seat have a lockingmechanism that must be activated tosecure a child seat.

1. 2.

3.

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt



48

０３／０９／０３　１１：３２：０４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００５１　



After confirming that the belt islocked, then grab the shoulderpart of the belt near the buckleand pull up to remove any slackfrom the lap part of the belt.Remember, if the lap part of thebelt is not tight, the child seat willnot be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side to side toverify that it is firmly secured. Ifthe child seat is not secure,unlatch the belt, allow it to retractfully, then repeat these steps.

4. 5.



０３／０９／０３　１１：３２：１１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００５２　



A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After securing the child seat in thedesired position (see page ), liftthe head restraint, then route thetether strap over the top of theseat-back and through the headrestraint legs.Lift the anchor point lid, thenattach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

After properly securing the childseat (see page ), route thetether strap over the top of theseat-back.

Attach the tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted, then tighten the strapaccording to the seat-maker’sinstructions.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

4648



Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Using an Outer Anchorage Point Using the Center AnchoragePoint

50

TETHER STRAP HOOK

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTSTETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

TETHER STRAP HOOK

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINT

０３／０９／０３　１１：３２：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００５３　



To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster and wear a lap/shoulder belt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

CONTINUED

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children


Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a larger child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

０３／０９／０３　１１：３２：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００５４　



Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat.

A child who has outgrown a forward-facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Some states also require children touse a booster until they reach agiven age or weight (e.g., 6 years or60 lbs). Be sure to check currentlaws in the state or states where youintend to drive.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

Using a Booster Seat



０３／０９／０３　１１：３２：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００５５　



Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards (see page ) andthat you follow the booster seatmaker’s instructions.

If a child who uses a booster mustride in front, move the vehicle seatas far to the rear as possible, and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of the ears areeven with the top of the seat-back. Achild of this height should be tallenough to use the lap/shoulder beltwithout a booster.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenages 12 and under be properlyrestrained in the back seat.

Even with advanced front airbags,the back seat is the safest place for achild of any age or size.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, it can cause seriousinjuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

The side airbag also poses risks. Ifany part of a larger child’s body is inthe path of a deploying side airbag,the child could receive possiblyserious injuries.

44

CONTINUED



When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front

53

０３／０９／０３　１１：３２：５９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００５６　



Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in thefront. There are other importantfactors you should consider.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly positioned and secured.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster, the child should not sit inthe front.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

14 51

Maturity

Physical Size



０３／０９／０３　１５：４２：０６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００５７　



This could result inserious neck injuries during a crash.

This could causevery serious injuries during a crash.It also increases the chance that thechild will slide under the belt in acrash and be injured.

If they do, they couldbe very seriously injured in a crash.

Devices intended to improve achild’s comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt can makethe belt less effective, and increasethe chance of serious injury in acrash.

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the back orunder the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not put any accessories on a seatbelt.



０３／０９／０３　１１：３３：１７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００５８　



Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

With the trunk lid open, air flow canpull exhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk lid open, open all the windows,and set the heating and coolingsystem as shown below.

Select the Fresh Air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

If you must sit in your parked vehicle,even in an unconfined area, with theengine running, adjust the heatingand cooling system as follows:

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged the under-side.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard


Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

０３／０９／０３　１１：３３：２７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００５９　



Safety Labels


０３／０９／０３　１１：３４：１０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００６０　

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully. Ifa label comes off or becomes hard toread, contact your Honda dealer fora replacement.

HOODU.S. models

DASHBOARDU.S. models only

Canadian models

RADIATORCAP

Canadian models

SUN VISORU.S. models

DOORJAMBSOn cars with side airbagsU.S. models Canadian models

On cars with side curtain airbagsU.S. models Canadian models



This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour Honda. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60............................Instrument Panel . 61

................Instrument Panel Lights . 62.............................................Gauges . 68

Odometer/Outside...........Temperature Indicator . 68

.....................................Odometer . 68...................................Trip Meter . 69

...................Temperature Gauge . 69..................................Fuel Gauge . 70

Maintenance Required...................................Indicator . 70

Controls Near the Steering.......................................Wheel . 72

..................Wipers and Washers . 73.......Turn Signal and Headlights . 74

Automatic Lighting Off.....................................Feature . 75

............Daytime Running Lights . 76....Instrument Panel Brightness . 76

..........................Hazard Warning . 76.............Rear Window Defogger . 77

......Steering Wheel Adjustment . 78...............................Keys and Locks . 79

..............................................Keys . 79....................Immobilizer System . 81

............................Ignition Switch . 82..................................Door Locks . 83

Setting the Childproof Door........................................Locks . 85

...................Remote Transmitter . 85...........................................Trunk . 89

........Emergency Trunk Opener . 90....................................Seat Heaters . 91

...................................................Seat . 92............Power Seat Adjustments . 92...........Driver’s Lumbar Support . 92

.............Front Seat Adjustments . 93Driver’s Seat Manual Height

..............................Adjustment . 94Driver’s Seat Power Height

..............................Adjustment . 94..........................Head Restraints . 94

.......................Folding Rear Seat . 95.............................................Mirrors . 98

....Adjusting the Power Mirrors . 98..............................Power Windows . 99

Power Window Control.............................Operations . 101

.......................................Moonroof . 102...............................Parking Brake . 103

........................................Sun Visor . 104................................Vanity Mirror . 104...............................Interior Lights . 105

..........Interior Convenience Item . 106.....................Beverage Holders . 107

........Accessory Power Sockets . 107.............Console Compartment . 107

....................Sunglasses Holder . 108..................................Glove Box . 108

Instruments and Controls

Instruments and Controls 59

０３／０９／０３　１１：３４：１８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００６２　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


Control Locations

Instruments and Controls60

PARKING BRAKE

POWER DOOR LOCKSWITCHES

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE/FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE

HOOD RELEASEHANDLE

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

CRUISE CONTROLINDICATOR LIGHTSAND GAUGES

MIRROR CONTROLS

MOONROOF CONTROLS

ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

HAZARD WARNINGLIGHTS

AUDIO SYSTEM

DIGITAL CLOCK

(P.110)CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

HEATING/COOLINGCONTROLS

(P.62, 68)

(P.102)

(P.98)

(P.83)

(P.99)

(P.89/165) (P.166)(P.103)

(P.107)

(P.119)

(P.76)

(P.153)

(P.155)

(P.122, 130, 140, 145)

０３／０９／０３　１１：３４：２５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００６３　



The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.

Instrument Panel


CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

MALFUNCTIONINDICATOR LAMP

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEMINDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE AND BRAKESYSTEM INDICATOR

TCS ACTIVATION INDICATORLOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM INDICATOR

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM(ABS) INDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTALRESTRAINT SYSTEMINDICATOR

DOOR AND TRUNKOPEN MONITOR

SIDE AIRBAG CUTOFFINDICATOR

CRUISE CONTROL MAININDICATOR

(P.62)

(P.62)

(P.62)(P.65)

(P.62)

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.65)

(P.64)

(P.63)

(P.63)

(P.64)

(P.63)

HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.66)

SEAT BELT INDICATOR (P.62)

(P.67)

(P.64)

(P.67)

(P.67)

(P.70)

(P.66)

０３／０９／０３　１１：３４：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００６４　



The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

If you turn the ignition switch to ON(II) without fastening your seat belt,the beeper starts to sound, and theindicator starts to blink. The beeperstops sounding several seconds laterbut the indicator will remain lit.

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running. Forcomplete information, see page .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged. For more information,see page .

See page .

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). It is areminder to check the parkingbrake. If you drive at certainspeeds without fully releasing theparking brake, the beeper soundscontinuously. Driving with theparking brake not fully releasedcan damage the brakes and tires.

If you drive without your seat beltfastened, the indicator remains onand the beeper will sound every fewseconds.

If it remains lit after you fullyrelease the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, therecould be a problem with the brakesystem. For complete information,see page .

1.

2.

259

260

260

262

Instrument Panel Lights


Seat Belt Reminder Light

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Parking Brake and BrakeSystem Indicator

62

U.S. Canada

０３／０９／０３　１１：３４：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００６５　



On all V6 modelsOnly on models equipped with sideairbags

This indicator lights briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to ON(II). If it comes on at any other time,it indicates a potential problem withyour front airbags. This indicator willalso alert you to a potential problemwith your side airbags, passenger’sside airbag automatic cutoff system,side curtain airbags, automatic seatbelt tensioners, driver’s seat positionsensor, or front passenger’s weightsensors. For more information, seepage .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II), and whenthe ignition switch is turned toSTART (III). If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem in theABS. If this happens, have yourvehicle checked by your Hondadealer. With the indicator on, yourvehicle still has normal brakingability but no anti-lock. For completeinformation, see page .

This indicator lights when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II). If itcomes on at any other time, itindicates that the passenger’s sideairbag has automatically shut off.For complete information, see page

.

28

29

190



Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

TCS Activation Indicator

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)Indicator

Side Airbag Off Indicator

63

０３／０９／０３　１１：３５：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００６６　



On all V6 modelsOn all V6 models

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If it comeson and stays on when the TractionControl System (TCS) is on, there isa problem with the TCS. For moreinformation on the TCS, see page

.

This indicator has three functions:It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the TractionControl System.

It flashes when the TCS isregulating wheelspin.

If it comes on and stays on whenthe Traction Control System is on,it indicates that there is a problemin the TCS.

This indicator normally also comeson for a few seconds when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II). If itcomes on and stays on at any othertime, or it does not come on whenyou turn the ignition switch to ON(II), there is a problem with the TCS.Take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. See page formore information on the TCS.

The appropriate indicator comes onin this display if the trunk or eitherdoor is not closed tightly.

All the indicators in the monitordisplay come on for a few secondswhen you turn the ignition switch toON (II).

1.

2.

3. 191

191



Door and Trunk Open MonitorTraction Control System(TCS) Indicator

TCS Activation Indicator

64

０３／０９／０３　１１：３５：１５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００６７　



The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicators do not blink,or if they blink rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see pages and ).Replace the bulb as soon as possible,since other drivers cannot see thatyou are signaling.

When you turn on the HazardWarning button, both turn signalindicators blink. All turn signals onthe outside of the vehicle shouldflash.

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. If you turn theignition switch to ACCESSORY (I)or LOCK (0) without turning off thelight switch, this indicator willremain on. A reminder chime willalso sound when you open the driver’sdoor.

This indicator comes on as areminder that you must refuel soon.

231 233

Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Lights On Indicator Low Fuel Indicator



LOW FUEL INDICATOR

０３／０９／０３　１１：３５：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００６８　



Canadian models onlyThis indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to ON (II)with the headlight switch off and theparking brake set. It should go off ifyou turn on the headlights or releasethe parking brake. If it comes on atany other time, it means there is aproblem with the DRL. There mayalso be a problem with the highbeam headlights.

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. See page

for information on the headlightcontrols.

On Canadian models, this indicatorcomes on with reduced brightnesswhen the Daytime Running Lights(DRL) are on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. See page

for more information on thesecurity system.154

76

75

Security System Indicator ‘‘Daytime RunningLights’’ Indicator

High Beam Indicator



SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

０３／０９／０３　１１：３５：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００６９　



This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II). It will go off if youhave inserted a properly-codedignition key. If it is not a properly-coded key, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator also blinks severaltimes when you turn the ignitionswitch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY(I) or LOCK (0).

This indicator comes on when thewasher fluid level is low. Add washerfluid when you see this indicatorcome on (see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the Cruise Control MasterButton. (see page .)

This indicator comes on when youset the cruise control. See page

for information on operating thecruise control.

155 155

218

81

Canadian models only

Only on models equipped with CruiseControl System

Only on models equipped with CruiseControl System

Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Washer Level Indicator

Cruise Control MainIndicator

Cruise Control Indicator



０３／０９／０３　１１：３５：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００７０　



The odometer and the outsidetemperature indicator use the samedisplay. To switch the displaybetween the odometer and theoutside temperature, press theSelect/Reset knob. When you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II), whatyou last selected is displayed.

The odometer shows the total dis-tance your vehicle has been driven.It measures miles in U.S. models andkilometers in Canadian models.It is illegal under U.S. federal law andCanadian provincial regulations todisconnect, reset, or alter theodometer with the intent to changethe number of miles or kilometersindicated.

This indicator displays the outsidetemperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.models) or Centigrade (Canadianmodels). To see the outsidetemperature, press and release theSelect/Reset knob until thetemperature is displayed.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. Therefore, thetemperature reading can be affectedby heat reflection from the roadsurface, engine heat, and theexhaust from surrounding traffic.This can cause an incorrecttemperature reading when yourspeed is under 19 mph (30 km/h).When you start your trip, the sensoris not fully acclimatized, therefore itmay take several minutes until theproper temperature is displayed.

On 4-cylinder EX models with leatherinterior and all 6-cylinder EX models

Odometer/Outside TemperatureIndicator

Odometer

Outside Temperature Indicator

Gauges


TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER FUEL GAUGE

TEMPERATUREGAUGE

MAINTENANCEREQUIREDINDICATOR

TRIP METER

U.S. model is shown.

SELECT/RESETKNOB

ODOMETER/OUTSIDETEMPERATURE INDICATOR

０３／０９／０３　１１：３６：００　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００７１　



± ±

－－－－－－－－

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it.

There are two trip meters: Trip Aand Trip B. Switch between thesedisplays and the odometer/outsidetemperature display by pressing theSelect/Reset knob repeatedly. Eachtrip meter works independently, soyou can keep track of two differentdistances.

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise into theupper half of the gauge. If it reachesthe red (Hot) mark, pull safely to theside of the road. Turn to page forinstructions and precautions onchecking the engine’s coolingsystem.

If the outside temperature isincorrectly displayed, you can adjustit up to 5°F ( 3°C) warmer orcooler.

NOTE: The temperature must bestabilized before doing thisprocedure.

Select the outside temperaturedisplay, then press the Select/Resetknob for ten seconds. The followingsequence will appear for one secondeach: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 5, 4, 3, 2,

1, 0, 1 (0, 1, 2, 3, 3, 2, 1, 0, 1).

When it reaches the desired value,release the Select/Reset knob. Youshould see the new outsidetemperature displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), what you last selected isdisplayed.

To reset a trip meter, display it andthen press and hold the Select/Resetknob until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’.Both trip meters will reset if thevehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected.

257

Trip Meter Temperature Gauge

Gauges


０３／０９／０３　１１：３６：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００７２　



CONTINUED

This shows how much fuel you have.It may show slightly more or lessthan the actual amount. The needlereturns to the bottom after you turnoff the ignition.

For the first 8,000 miles (12,800 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

This indicator reminds you that it istime to take your vehicle in for thevehicle’s scheduled maintenanceunder normal driving conditions. Theindicator does not reflect severemaintenance intervals.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedulefor Normal and Severe DrivingConditions on page (4-cylindermodels) or page (6-cylindermodels).

204206

4-cylinder models

Fuel Gauge Maintenance Required Indicator

Gauges


SELECT/RESET KNOB

MAINTENANCE REQUIREDINDICATOR

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

０３／０９／０３　１１：３６：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００７３　



6-cylinder modelsExcept 6-cylinder modelsFor the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)after the Maintenance RequiredIndicator is reset, it will come on fortwo seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II).

Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and7,500 miles (12,000 km) thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Your dealer will reset this indicatorafter completing the scheduledmaintenance. If this maintenance isdone by someone other than yourHonda dealer, reset the indicator asfollows.

Turn off the engine.

Press and hold the Select/Resetknob in the instrument panel, thenturn the ignition switch to ON (II).

Hold the knob for approximatelyten seconds until the indicatorresets.

If you exceed 10,000 miles (16,000km) without having the scheduledmaintenance performed, thisindicator will remain on as a constantreminder.

Between 8,000 miles (12,800 km)and 10,000 miles (16,000 km), thisindicator will light for two secondswhen you first turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II), and then flash forten seconds.

1.

2.

3.

Gauges


０３／０９／０３　１１：３６：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００７４　



Controls Near the Steering Wheel


WINDSHIELDWIPERS/WASHERS

MOONROOFSWITCH

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS

TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM HORNTILT/TELESCOPICADJUSTMENT

INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS

(P.102)

HAZARDWARNING LIGHTS

CRUISE CONTROLS

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER

SEAT HEATERS

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR(P.31)

(P.76)

(P.74)

(P.191)(P.78)

(P.73)

(P.76)

(P.155)

(P.77, 113, 116)

(P.91)

０３／０９／０３　１１：３６：４０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００７５　



－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO LowHI HighWindshield Washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

The length of the wiperinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to the vehicle’s speed.

Vary the delay by turning the INTTIME ring. If you turn it to theshortest delay, the wipers willchange to low speed operation whenthe vehicle speed exceeds 12 mph(20 km/h).

Pull thewiper control lever toward you andhold it. The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers run atlow speed, then complete one moresweep after you release the lever.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Windshield Wiper

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

INT

Windshield Washer

Wipers and Washers


０３／０９／０３　１１：３６：５１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００７６　



－－

Turn SignalOffParking and interior lightsHeadlight onHigh beamsFlash high beams

Push down on theleft lever to signal a left turn and upto signal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever inthe proper direction and hold it. Thelever will return to center when yourelease it or complete a turn.

Rotating theswitch on the left lever to the‘‘ ’’ position turns on the parkinglights, taillights, instrument panellights, side-marker lights, and rearlicense plate lights. Turning theswitch to the ‘‘ ’’ position turnson the headlights. If you leave thelights on with the ignition switch inACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0), youwill hear a reminder chime when youopen the driver’s door.

When the light switch is in either ofthese positions, the Lights Onindicator comes on as a reminder.

1.2.3.4.5.6.

Turn Signal and Headlights Turn Signal Headlights ON

Turn Signal, Headlights


０３／０９／０３　１１：３６：５９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００７７　



－

This feature turns off the headlights,parking lights, taillights, and licenseplate light within 15 seconds ofremoving the key from the ignitionswitch and closing the driver’s door.

This feature activates if you leavethe headlight switch in the ‘‘ ’’or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove the key,then open and close the driver’s door.

If you remove the key from theignition switch with the headlightswitch on, but do not open the doorand get out, the lights will turn offafter 10 minutes.

The lights will turn on again whenyou unlock or open the driver’s door.If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightswill go off. With the driver’s dooropen, you will hear a lights-onreminder chime.

To turn on, pushthe lever forward until you hear aclick. The blue high beam indicatorwill light (see page ). Pull it backto return to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams will stay on as long as youhold the lever back.

66

On all U.S. and Canadian models exceptDX

Automatic Lighting Off FeatureHigh Beams

Headlights, Automatic Lighting Off Feature


０３／０９／０３　１１：３７：０８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００７８　



With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights and the highbeam indicator come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) andrelease the parking brake. Theyremain on until you turn the ignitionoff, even if you set the parking brake.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

The knob on the instrument panelcontrols the brightness of the instru-ment panel lights. Turn the knob toadjust the brightness.

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both turn indicators in theinstrument panel to flash. Use thehazard warning lights if you need topark in a dangerous area near heavytraffic, or if your vehicle is disabled.

Instrument Panel Brightness Hazard WarningDaytime Running Lights(Canadian Models)

Daytime Running Lights, Instrument Panel Brightness, Hazard Warning


INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESSKNOB

０３／０９／０３　１１：３７：２０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００７９　



Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

The rear window defogger will clearfog, frost, and thin ice from thewindow. Push the defogger button toturn it on and off. The indicatorabove the button lights to show thedefogger is on. It also shuts off whenyou turn off the ignition. You have toturn it on again when you restart thevehicle.

Rear Window Defogger


Manual A/C type shown

０３／０９／０３　１１：３７：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００８０　



Insert the key in the ignitionswitch, and unlock the steeringcolumn.

Push the lever under the steeringcolumn all the way down.

Move the steering wheel up ordown, and in or out to the desiredposition, making sure the wheelpoints toward your chest, nottoward your face. Make sure youcan see the instrument panelgauges and the indicator lights.

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

1.

2.

3.

See page for important safetyinformation about how to properlyposition the steering wheel.

16

Steering Wheel Adjustment


Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

０３／０９／０３　１１：３７：３４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００８１　



Push the lever up to lock thesteering wheel in that position.

Make sure you have securelylocked the steering wheel in placeby trying to move it up, down, in,and out.

4.

5.

Keys and Locks

Steering Wheel Adjustment, Keys and Locks


MASTERKEY(BLACK)

MASTERKEY WITHREMOTETRANSMITER

VALET KEY(LIGHT GREY)

Only on DX models On all models except DX

KEYNUMBERTAG

KEYNUMBERTAG

VALET KEY(LIGHT GREY)

０３／０９／０３　１１：３７：４１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００８２　



You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Honda-approved key blanks.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theImmobilizer System. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The DX model keys do not containbatteries. Do not try to take themapart.

The master key fits all the locks onyour vehicle. The valet key worksonly in the ignition and the door lock.You can keep the trunk releasehandle, rear seat trunk access, andglove box locked when you leaveyour vehicle and the valet key at aparking facility.

Keys and Locks


０３／０９／０３　１１：３７：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００８３　



If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your key,contact your Honda dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undriveable.

If you have lost your key and youcannot start the engine, contact aHonda dealer.

The Immobilizer System protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine’s fuelsystem is disabled.

When you turn the ignition switch toON (II), the Immobilizer Systemindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go out. If the indicatorstarts to blink, it means the systemdoes not recognize the coding of thekey. Turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0), remove the key, reinsertit, and turn the switch to ON (II)again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou insert the key.

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

Immobilizer System


０３／０９／０３　１１：３８：００　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００８４　



－－

－

－

You can insert orremove the key only in this position.To turn the key, the shift lever mustbe in Park, and you must push thekey in slightly. If the front wheelsare turned, the anti-theft lock maymake it difficult to turn the key.Firmly turn the steering wheel to theleft or to the right as you turn thekey.

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), START (III)

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

This is the normal keyposition when driving. Several of thelights on the instrument panel comeon as a test when you turn theignition switch from ACCESSORY(I) to ON (II).

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to ON (II) when you let go ofthe key.

LOCK (0) ACCESSORY (I)

ON (II)

START (III)

Ignition Switch


Removing the key from theignition switch while drivinglocks the steering. This cancause you to lose control.

Remove the key from theignition switch only whenparked.

０３／０９／０３　１１：３８：０８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００８５　



You will hear a reminder beeper ifyou leave the key in the ignitionswitch in the LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I) position and openthe driver’s door. Remove the key toturn off the beeper. The shift levermust be in Park before you canremove the key from the ignitionswitch.

To lock the driver’s door, pull andhold either the inside or outside doorhandle, then push the lock tab down.Release the handle, then close thedoor.

Each front door has a master doorlock switch. Either switch locks andunlocks all doors. Push the top of theswitch to lock all doors; push thebottom to unlock them.

On all models except DX, you canopen or close the windows by usingthe key in the driver’ s door (seepage ).

To lock any passenger’s door whengetting out of the vehicle, push thelock tab in and close the door.

101

U.S. DX

On all models except U.S. DXDoor Locks

Ignition Switch, Door Locks


MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

０３／０９／０３　１１：３８：１６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００８６　



With the driver’s door open and thekey in the ignition, both door lockswitches are disabled. They are notdisabled if the driver’s door is closed.Pushing the switch down on theopen passenger’s door will lock alldoors.

On Canadian DX models, all doorscan be locked from the outside byusing the key in either front door. Tounlock only the driver’s door fromthe outside, insert the key in thedriver’s door lock, turn the key andrelease it. If you turn the key again,all doors will unlock. All four doorswill unlock when you unlock thepassenger’s door with the key.

On LX and EX models, all doors canbe locked from the outside by usingthe key in the driver’s door. Tounlock just the driver’s door, turn thekey and release it. If you turn thekey again, all doors will unlock.

Lockout Prevention

Door Locks


０３／０９／０３　１１：３８：２２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００８７　



－

－

You can open and close all powerwindows from outside the vehiclewith the key. With the remotetransmitter, you can open thewindows. Refer to Power Windowson page .

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from the insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up and use the outside doorhandle.

Press this button once tolock all doors. Some exterior andinterior lights will flash. You cannotlock it if any door is not fully closedor key is in the ignition switch.

When you push LOCK twice within 5seconds, you will hear a beep toverify that the security system hasset.

The ceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the center position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany door, the light stays on for about30 seconds, then fades out. If yourelock the doors with the remotetransmitter before 30 seconds haveelapsed, the light will go offimmediately.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Push ittwice to unlock the other doors.

99

On all models except U.S. DX

On the EX model

Setting the Childproof DoorLocks

Remote Transmitter

LOCK

UNLOCK

Childproof Door Locks, Remote Transmitter


PANICBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

UNLOCK/WINDOW-OPENBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

LEVER

０３／０９／０３　１１：３８：３４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００８８　



－

You cannot lock the doors with theremote transmitter if any door is notfully closed or the key is in theignition switch.

If you unlock the doors with theremote transmitter, but do not openany of the doors within 30 seconds,the doors automatically relock. Onthe EX model, the security systemwill also set.

Press this button forabout one second to attract attention;the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remotetransmitter or turn the ignitionswitch to ON (II).

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by a Honda dealer.

To open the trunk, push the TrunkRelease button for approximatelyone second.

The trunk will not open if the key isin the ignition switch.

On all models except U.S. and CanadaDX


PANIC

Remote Transmitter Care

Remote Transmitter


０３／０９／０３　１１：３８：４４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００８９　



＋

Battery type: CR1616

If it takes several pushes on thebutton to lock or unlock the doors,replace the battery as soon aspossible.

To replace the battery:

Remove the screw at the base ofthe transmitter with a smallPhillips-head screwdriver.

Separate the transmitter by pryingits middle seam with yourfingernail.

Inside the transmitter, separatethe inner cover from the keypadby releasing the two tabs on thecover.

Remove the old battery from theback of the inner cover, and notethe polarity. Make sure thepolarity of the new battery is thesame ( side facing down), theninsert it into the back of the cover.

Install the parts in reverse order.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Replacing the Transmitter Battery

Remote Transmitter


SCREW

BATTERY

TAB

０３／０９／０３　１１：３８：５４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００９０　






Remote Transmitter


０３／０９／０３　１１：３９：００　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００９１　



You can open the trunk in threeways:

Pull the trunk release handle tothe left of the driver’s seat.Use the master key to open thetrunk lock. The valet key does notwork in this lock.Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote transmitter.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

See page for cargo loading andweight limit information. Keep thetrunk lid closed at all times whiledriving to avoid damaging the lid,and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

To protect items in the trunk whenyou need to give the key to someoneelse:

Lock the trunk release handlewith the master key. Also makesure the trunk pass-through coveris locked (see page ).

Give the person the valet key.(all models except U.S. DX)

1.

2.56

174

97Carbon

Monoxide Hazard

Trunk


PullMASTER KEY

TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE MASTER KEY

０３／０９／０３　１１：３９：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００９２　



As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the trunk latch sothe trunk can be opened from theinside.

To open the trunk, push the releaselever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see page .18

Emergency Trunk Opener

Trunk


０３／０９／０３　１１：３９：２０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００９３　



After the seat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe back of the switch. This will keepthe seat warm.

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat’s temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The ignition switchmust be in the ON (II) position touse them. The seat heater switch islocated on each front door. Push thefront of the switch, HI, to rapidlyheat up the seat.

On EX-V6 models and EX models withleather interior

Seat Heaters


０３／０９／０３　１１：３９：２９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００９４　



－See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position seats and seat-backs.

On EX-V6 model

On all EX and EX-V6 models

12 13

On all V6 models, and the 4-cylinder EXmodel with leather interior

Moving the long horizontal switchadjusts the seat bottom in severaldirections. The seat bottom adjustsin the direction you move the switch.The short vertical switch adjusts theseat back angle.

Raises or lowers theseat.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

Moves the front of theseat up or down andthe rear of the seat upor down.

Moves the seatforward and backward.

The passenger’s seat also has poweradjustable controls.

To change the lumbar support, movethe lever on the right side of theseat-back forward or backward.Keep moving the lever forward orbackward until you find a suitableposition.

The controls for the adjustabledriver’s power seat are on theoutside edge of the seat bottom. Youcan adjust the power seat with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Driver’s Lumbar SupportPower Seat Adjustment

Seats


０３／０９／０３　１１：３９：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００９５　



The front passenger’s seat in all4-cylinder models, and the LX V-6models adjusts manually.

To adjust the seat forward andbackward, pull up on the lever underthe seat cushion’s front edge. Movethe seat to the desired position andrelease the lever. Try to move theseat to make sure it is locked inposition.

To change the seat-back angle, pullup on the lever on the outside of theseat bottom.

The 4-cylinder EX model withoutleather interior has a power heightadjustment for the driver’s seat. Allother seat adjustments in this modelare manual.

The U.S. DX and LX models havemanual seat adjustments (see nextcolumn).

Front Seat Adjustments

Seats


０３／０９／０３　１１：３９：５３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００９６　



The height of your driver’s seat isadjustable. To raise the seat bottom,repeatedly pull up the lever on theoutside of the seat cushion. To lowerthe seat, push down the leverrepeatedly.

The height of your driver’s seat ispower adjustable. Pull up on theswitch to raise the seat. Push it downto lower the seat.

Make all adjustments before youstart driving.

Your vehicle is equipped with headrestraints in all seating positions tohelp protect you and yourpassengers from whiplash and otherinjuries.

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

14On 4-cylinder DX and LX models On 4-cylinder EX models without leather

interior

Head RestraintsDriver’s Seat Manual HeightAdjustment

Driver’s Seat Power HeightAdjustment

Seats


RELEASE BUTTON

０３／０９／０３　１１：４０：０５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００９７　



They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

The front and rear head restraintsadjust for height. You need bothhands to adjust the restraint. Do notattempt to adjust it while driving. Toraise it, pull upward. To lower therestraint, push the release buttonsideways and push the restraintdown.

The back of the rear seat folds down,giving you direct access to the trunk.The seat-back can be released frominside the vehicle or inside the trunk.

When storing cargo, you can movethe rear center shoulder belt out ofthe way by removing the belt fromthe guide.

To fold down the seat-back frominside the vehicle, insert the masterkey in the lock on the rear shelf.Turn the key clockwise, pull downthe top of the seat-back, then releasethe key.

Folding Rear Seat

Seats


MASTER KEY

GUIDE

０３／０９／０３　１１：４０：１４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００９８　



To release the seat-back from insidethe trunk, pull the release loop underthe trunk panel.

To lock the seat-back upright, push itfirmly against the trunk panel. Makesure it is latched in place by pullingon the top of the seat.

Make sure all rear shoulder belts arepositioned in front of the rear seat-back whenever the seat-back is in itsupright position.

Make sure all items in the trunk, oritems extending through the openinginto the back seat, are secured.Loose items can fly forward andcause injury if you have to brakehard. See on page

.

Never drive with the seat-backfolded down and the trunk lid open.See onpage .56

173Carrying Cargo


Seats


Pull

０３／０９／０３　１１：４０：２２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　００９９　



For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with themaster key. To lock the cover, insertthe key and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .

The trunk pass-through cover can beopened from either side; it foldsforward onto the center armrest.Open the cover by sliding the knobdownward and pushing or pulling onthe cover. To close the cover, swingit up and push firmly on the top.Make sure it latches properly.Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

56

On all LX and EX models

Trunk Pass-through Cover


Seats


KNOB

LID

KEY CYLINDER

０３／０９／０３　１１：４０：３１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１００　



Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

The outside mirrors on DX modelsadjust manually.

The inside mirror has day and nightpositions. The night position reducesglare from headlights behind you.Flip the tab on the bottom edge ofthe mirror to select the day or nightposition.

Push or pull the adjustment knobright, left, up, or down to move themirror.

Turn the adjustment knob to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).

When you finish, turn theadjustment knob to the center(off) position. This turns off theadjustment knob to keep yoursettings.

1.

3.

2.

4.


Adjusting the Power Mirrors

Mirrors


TAB

ADJUSTMENT KNOB

０３／０９／０３　１１：４０：４３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１０１　



－

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off.

To open the driver’swindow, push the window switchfirmly down, then release it. Thewindow automatically goes down allthe way. To stop the window fromgoing all the way down, pull back onthe window switch briefly.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II)to raise or lower any window, pushthe switch down and hold it. Releasethe switch when you want thewindow to stop. Close the window bypulling the switch up and holding it. The passenger windows cannot be

raised or lowered if the MAIN switchis OFF. Keep the MAIN switch offwhen you have children in thevehicle so they do not injurethemselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

On all Canadian models except DXPower Mirror Heaters

AUTO

Power Windows

Mirrors, Power Windows


HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

DRIVER’S WINDOWSWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

０３／０９／０３　１１：４０：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１０２　



－To close the driver’s window fully,pull back the window switch firmly,then release it. The windowautomatically goes all the way up. Tostop the window from going all theway up, push down on the windowswitch briefly.

To open or close the driver’s windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly and hold it.The window will stop when yourelease the switch.

If the driver’swindow runs into any obstacle whileit is closing automatically, it willreverse direction and then stop. Toclose the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thedriver’s window fuse is removed, theAUTO function will be disabled. Thepower window system needs to bereset after reconnecting the batteryor installing the fuse.

Start the engine. Push down andhold the driver’s window switchuntil the window is fully open.

Pull and hold the driver’s windowswitch to close the windowcompletely, then hold the switchfor a second or two more.

If the power windows do not operateproperly after resetting, have yourvehicle checked by a Honda dealer.

1.

2.

AUTO REVERSE

Power Windows


０３／０９／０３　１１：４１：０１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１０３　



The power window system has a key-off delay function. The windows willstill operate for up to ten minutesafter you turn off the ignition.Opening either front door cancelsthe delay function. You must turnthe ignition switch to ON (II) againbefore you can raise or lower thewindows.

You can open all of the windowsfrom the outside with the remotetransmitter.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. Thepassenger’s doors unlock, and allfour windows start to open. Tostop the windows, release thebutton.

To open the windows further,press the button again.

You cannot close the windows withthe remote transmitter.

To open:

You can open and close the windowswith the key in the driver’s door lock.

Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

All models except U.S. and Canada DX

Power Window ControlOperationsOpening the Windows with theRemote Transmitter

Opening/Closing the Windows withthe Key

Power Windows


UNLOCK BUTTON

Open

Close

０３／０９／０３　１１：４１：１５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１０４　



Turn the key clockwise again, andhold it. All four windows start toopen. To stop the windows,release the key.

To open the windows further, turnand hold the key again.

To close:Insert the key in the driver’s doorlock.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows start to close. To stop thewindows, release the key.

To close the windows further, turnand hold the key again.

The moonroof has two positions: itcan be tilted up in the back forventilation, or it can be slid back intothe roof. Use the switch under theleft dashboard vent to operate themoonroof. The ignition switch mustbe ON (II).

To tilt up the back of the moonroof,press and hold the center button( ). To close the moonroof,press and hold the upper button( ). To open the moonroof,press and hold the lower button( ). Release the button whenthe moonroof gets to the desiredposition. Make sure everyone’shands are away from the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

1.

2.

3.

4.

3.

4.


Moonroof

Power Windows, Moonroof


MOONROOF SWITCH

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

０３／０９／０３　１１：４１：３１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１０５　



To apply the parking brake, pull thelever up fully. To release it, pull upslightly, push the button, and lowerthe lever. The parking brake light onthe instrument panel should go outwhen the parking brake is fullyreleased with the engine running(see page ).

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to ten minutes afteryou turn off the ignition. The key-offdelay cancels as soon as you openeither front door. You must thenturn the ignition ON (II) for themoonroof to operate.

62

Parking Brake

Moonroof, Parking Brake


NOTICE:

PARKING BRAKE LEVER

Driving the vehicle with theparking brake applied can damage therear brakes and hubs.

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or motor.

０３／０９／０３　１１：４１：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１０６　



To use a vanity mirror on the back ofthe sun visor, pull up the cover.

All models except the DX havelighted vanity mirrors.

The lights beside the mirror comeon when you pull up the cover.

In this position, the sun visor can beextended by sliding out theextension (all models except DX andthose with side curtain airbags).Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.

To use the sun visor, pull it down.You can also use the sun visor at theside window. Remove the supportrod from the clip and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.

Do not use the sun visor extensionover the rear view mirror.

On EX-V6 models without side curtainairbags

Sun Visor Vanity Mirror


Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror

104

EXTENSION

０３／０９／０３　１１：４１：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１０７　



The ceiling lights have a three ortwo-position switch; ON (for three-position), Door Activated, and OFF.In the Door Activated (center or left)position, the lights come on whenyou:

After all doors are closed tightly, thelight dims slightly, then fades out inabout 30 seconds.

Open any door.Unlock the doors with the key orremote transmitter.

The front ceiling light also containstwo spotlights. Push the spotlightlenses to turn it on and off.

The courtesy light between thespotlights comes on when you turnthe parking lights on. To adjust itsbrightness, turn the Select/Resetknob on the instrument panel.

Push on the spotlight lenses to turnthe light on and off.

The courtesy lights in the frontdoors and around the ignition switchcome on when you open any door.After you close the door, the ignitionswitch light stays on for severalseconds.

On EX and EX-V6

On LX modelsCeiling Light

Individual Interior Lights

Interior Lights


DOOR ACTIVATED

ON

OFF

DOOR ACTIVATED

COURTESY LIGHT

０３／０９／０３　１１：４２：０１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１０８　



＊＊

Interior Convenience Item


REAR DOOR POCKET

BEVERAGE HOLDER

CENTER POCKET/COIN POCKET/ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT/ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET

FRONT DOOR POCKET/BEVERAGE HOLDER

BEVERAGE HOLDERS

GLOVE BOX

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKET : For some types

０３／０９／０３　１１：４２：０６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１０９　



Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Liquid can also spillfrom the door pocket beverageholders when you close the doors.Use only resealable containers in thedoor pockets.

Spilled liquids can damage theupholstery, carpeting, and electricalcomponents in the interior.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).None of the sockets will power anautomotive type cigarette lighterelement. When more than onesocket is being used, the combinedpower rating of the accessoriesshould be 120 watts or less(10 amps).

To open the console compartment,pull up on the right lever and lift thearmrest.

To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on theleft lever and lift up the armrest.

On models except DX, the tray in theconsole compartment has a coinholder.

Beverage Holders

Accessory Power Sockets

Console Compartment



CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

RIGHT LEVER LEFT LEVER

０３／０９／０３　１１：４２：２０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１１０　



To open the sunglasses holder, pushon the front edge. Make sure theholder is closed while you are driving.

Some larger styles of sunglassesmay not fit in the holder.

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle to the left. Close it with a firmpush. Lock or unlock the glove boxwith the master key.

The glove box light comes on whenthe parking lights are on.


Sunglasses Holder Glove Box



GLOVE BOX

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

０３／０９／０３　１１：４２：３２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１１１　



The security system helps to dis-courage vandalism and theft of yourHonda.

The heating and air conditioningsystems in your Honda provide acomfortable driving environment inall weather conditions.

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.

Your Honda has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 110...........................Air Flow Buttons . 112

.............Vents, Heating, and A/C . 115..........Dual Temperature Control . 119

..............Climate Control Sensors . 121..........................Playing the Radio . 122

..............................To the Radio . 124....................To Select a Station . 124

.................Adjusting the Sound . 127....................Radio Frequencies . 128

........................Radio Reception . 128..................................Playing a CD . 130

..........Playing a CD, CD Changer . 132.............................To Play a CD . 132

...............To Stop Playing a CD . 135Removing CD’s from the

.................................Changer . 135Operating the Optional CD

.................................Changer . 136.........CD Player Error Messages . 137

.....CD Changer Error Messages . 138.....................Protecting your CDs . 139

.................General Information . 139.........................Protecting CD’s . 139

...............................Playing a Tape . 140..........................To Play a Tape . 142

............To Stop Playing a Tape . 142

............Tape Search Functions . 143.....Caring the Tape and Player . 144

Playing the XM Satellite......................................Radio . 145

...............Satellite Digital Radio . 145...To Play XM Satellite Radio . 146

..................To Select a Channel . 146..............Satellite Radio Signals . 148

Receiving Satellite Radio....................................Service . 149

.............Steering Wheel Controls . 151.................Radio Theft Protection . 152

..........................Setting the Clock . 153............................Security System . 154

...............................Cruise Control . 155HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 158

On all models except 4-cylinder LXmodel

Features

Features 109

TM

TM

０３／０９／０３　１１：４２：４０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１１２　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


Vents, Heating, and A/C

Features110

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

MAX A/C BUTTON

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL(DRIVER’S SIDE)

FAN CONTROLBUTTONS

SET TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

TEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL(PASSENGER’S SIDE)

MODEBUTTON

RECIRCULATION BUTTON

AIRCONDITIONINGBUTTON

AUTO BUTTON

OFF BUTTON

DUAL BUTTON WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON

FAN SPEEDINDICATOR

AIRCONDITIONINGBUTTON

MODE BUTTONS


REAR WINDOWDEFOGGERBUTTON

WINDSHIELDDEFROST BUTTON

FAN CONTROL DIAL

All models except EX-L and EX-V6 EX-L and EX-V6 Models without Navigation System

０３／０９／０３　１１：４２：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１１３　




Features 111

AUTO BUTTON

MODE ICONS

A/C BUTTON

AIR CONDITIONING ICONS

FAN CONTROL ICONS

DUAL BUTTON

TEMPERATURE CONTROLBUTTONS (PASSENGER’S SIDE)


WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

TEMPERATURE CONTROLBUTTONS (DRIVER’S SIDE)

SET TEMPERATURE INDICATOR

OFF BUTTON

EX-L and EX-V6 Models with Navigation System (U.S. Vehicles Only)

０３／０９／０３　１１：４２：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１１４　



▲ ▼

Air conditioning is optional for DXmodels. Your Honda dealer caninstall a Honda air conditioningsystem that is designed to fit in yourvehicle.

For EX-L and EX-V6 with navigationsystem, see page for AutomaticClimate Control and ManualOperations information.

On EX-L and EX-V6 models with thenavigation system, you can manuallyselect the fan speed by pressing theA/C button next to the display andthen, pressing the fan control icons.

On EX-L and EX-V6 models withoutthe navigation system, you canmanually select the fan speed bypressing the fan control buttons. Thefan speed is represented by verticalbars in the display.

On all models except EX-L andEX-V6, turn this dial clockwise toincrease fan speed and increase theairflow.

Turning this dial clockwise increasesthe temperature of the airflow.

For vehicles with the navigationsystem, press the DUAL button andthe green indicator will come on.The driver and passenger can eachselect the temperature controlbuttons ( or ) to the desiredsetting.

When the indicator in the DUALbutton is off, both sides adjust to thesame temperature.

The driver and passenger can selectindependent temperature settings byselecting the DUAL button.

For vehicles without navigationsystem, push the DUAL button.When the indicator in the button islit, turn the dials to adjust thetemperature.

117

On all models except EX-L and EX-V6with Navigation System

On EX-L and EX-V6 models

Heating and Cooling

What Each Control DoesTemperature Control

Fan Control

Air Flow Buttons

Features112

０３／０９／０３　１１：４３：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１１５　



On all models except EX-L andEX-V6, this button turns the airconditioning on and off. The lightabove the button is on when the A/Cis on.

On vehicles without the navigationsystem, press the A/C button to turnon the A/C. You will see A/C ON orA/C OFF in the display.

When the light in or above thebutton is on, air from the vehicle’sinterior is sent throughout thesystem again. When the light is off,air is brought in from the outside ofthe vehicle (Fresh Air mode).

The outside air intakes for theheating and cooling system are atthe base of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in FreshAir mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in Recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.Switch to Recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to Fresh Airmode.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control buttons belowthe outside temperature.

On vehicles with the navigationsystem, press the A/C button to viewthe display. Touching ‘‘ON’’ or‘‘OFF’’ in the display turns the airconditioning on and off. You will seeA/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger off and on (see page ).77

EX-L and EX-V6Air Conditioning (A/C) Button

Rear Window Defogger Button

Recirculation Button

Air Flow Buttons

Features 113

０３／０９／０３　１１：４３：２０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１１６　



Use the mode control buttons oricons to select the vents the air flowsfrom. Some air will flow from thedashboard corner vents in all modes.

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Air flow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Air flow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

Air flows from the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When you select or ,the system automatically switches toFresh Air mode and turns on theA/C. In these modes, the A/C stayson with the indicator off.

When you select , the systemautomatically switches to Fresh Airmode.

Set the temperature control dial orthe button to the lower limit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

The system automaticallyturns on the A/C and switches toRecirculation mode. Air flows fromthe center and side vents in thedashboard.

Each time you press the MODEbutton, the display shows the modeselected.

Press the A/C button to view thedisplay, then touch any of the modeicons on the display.

1.

2.3.4.

For Vehicles without Navigation System

For Vehicles with Navigation System

All models except EX-L and EX-V6

On EX-L and EX-V6 model

Mode Control

Ventilation

MAX A/C Button

Air Flow Buttons

Features114

０３／０９／０３　１１：４３：４０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１１７　



▲ ▼

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereads normally.

Turn on the A/C by pressing thebutton. The light above or in thebutton comes on when a fan speedis selected.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial or button is set to theirlower limit.Select .If the outside air is humid, selectRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Press the A/C button, the ManualOperation A/C screen will appear.Select the ON icon on the display.Select the desired temperatureand MODE selections. If theoutside air is humid, select theRecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select Fresh Air mode.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in Fresh Air mode.

Select .When you select , the systemautomatically switches to theFresh Air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control dial.

Press the A/C button, the manualoperation of A/C screen willappear.Select the desired mode and fanspeed icons on the display.Adjust for warmth with thetemperature buttons ( or ).

To cool the interior with MAX A/C:Set the fan to the desired speed.Select the MAX A/C mode.The system automatically turns onthe A/C, selects andswitches to Recirculation mode.Make sure the temperaturecontrol dial is all the way to the left.

1.

2.

3.4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.3.

1.2.

3.

69

If the interior is very warm,

On all models except EX-L and EX-V6

Except EX-L and EX-V6 with NavigationSystem Except EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation

System

EX-L and EX-V6 with Navigation System


Using the Heater Using the A/C


Features 115

０３／０９／０３　１１：４３：５６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１１８　



Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

Switch the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and Fresh Air mode.Adjust the temperature controldial or buttons to your preference.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows:

Set the fan to the desired speed orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . When you select

, the system automaticallyswitches to Fresh Air mode andturns on the A/C. The A/Cindicator will not come on in U.S.vehicles.Set the temperature control dial orbuttons so the airflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the side vents.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C stays on.Press the A/C button to turn it off.

Select . The systemautomatically switches to FreshAir mode and turns on the A/C.The A/C indicator will not comeon in U.S. vehicles.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

To clear the windows faster, you canclose the dashboard corner vents byrotating the wheel below it. This willsend more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select the FreshAir mode to avoid fogging thewindows.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

1.

2.3.

Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows


Features116

０３／０９／０３　１１：４４：１０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１１９　



▲▼

－

The Automatic Climate Controlsystem can adjust the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

Press the AUTO button.

Set the desired temperature byturning the Temperature Controldial. You will see AUTO in thesystem’s display.

Set the desired temperature bypressing the to raise thetemperature or to lower thetemperature. The selectedtemperature will show in the upperdisplay.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air to raise or lower theinterior temperature to thetemperature you selected.

In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver and passenger. If the driver’sside of the vehicle is getting toomuch sun, the system will adjust to alower temperature.

If you set the temperature to itslowest limit, (Lo) or its highest limit,(Hi) the system runs at full coolingor heating only. It does not regulatethe interior temperature.

In cold weather, the fan will notcome on automatically until theheater starts to develop warm air.

Whenthe indicator in the Dual button is on,the driver’s side and passenger’s sidetemperature can be controlledindependently (see page ).

1.

2.

2.

119

Without Navigation System

With Navigation System

Dual Temperature Control


EX-L and EX-V6 models with NavigationSystem

EX-L and EX-V6 modelsTo Cool or Heat Automatically Using Automatic Climate Control

Features


117

０３／０９／０３　１１：４４：２５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１２０　



－

－

If you press OFF, the ClimateControl system shuts off completely.

Keep the system completely offfor short periods only.To keep stale air and mustinessfrom collecting, you should havethe fan running at all times.

When the Climate Control System isturned OFF, the temperature in theupper display will also turn off.

Turning the fan speed andtemperature control dials all the wayto the left shuts off the systemcompletely.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the Climate ControlSystem when it is in AUTO. All otherfeatures remain automaticallycontrolled.

Manual selections will cause theword AUTO in the display to go out.

Press the OFF button. However, alack of air flow can cause thewindows to fog up. It isrecommended that you keep the fanon at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

If you press the A/C button next tothe display, the manual selectionswill show in the display. Manualselection will cause the light in theAUTO button to turn off.


Except for EX and EX-V6 models

EX-L and EX-V6 without NavigationSystem


Features


Manual Operation To Turn Everything Off

118

０３／０９／０３　１１：４４：３６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１２１　






Your vehicle has two temperaturecontrol dials, one for the driver, andone for the passenger.

Your vehicle has four temperaturecontrol buttons, two for the driver,and two for the passenger.

The driver’s side and the passenger’sside can be controlled independentlyby adjusting these dials or buttonswhen the green indicator in theDUAL button is lit.

Push AUTO or . The selectedtemperatures appear in the upperdisplay. For vehicles when theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature by adjusting thedriver’s side temperature control dialor buttons.

CONTINUED


Comfort and Convenience Features

Temperature Control Dials/Buttons

119

DUAL BUTTON


DUAL BUTTON

DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL BUTTONS


DRIVER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

PASSENGER’S SIDETEMPERATURECONTROL DIAL

０３／０９／０３　１１：４４：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１２２　



▲ ▼

▲ ▼

To set the driver’s side temperatureto a different value than thepassenger’s, press the DUAL button,then turn the driver’s control dial orpress the or buttons on thedriver’s side. To set the passenger’sside to a different value than thedriver’s, turn the passenger’s controldial or press the or buttons onthe passenger’s side. You can adjustthe passenger’s side withoutpressing the DUAL button first.

When you set the temperature to itslower limit or its upper limit, it will bedisplayed as ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’.


Comfort and Convenience Features120

DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE

０３／０９／０３　１１：４４：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１２３　



The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight Sensor/TemperatureSensor

Features

Climate Control Sensors

121

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

０３／０９／０３　１１：４５：０１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１２４　



Playing the Radio

Features122

DX and LX Models

EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 Modelswithout Navigation System

STEREO INDICATOR

AM/FMBUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

SEEK BAR

TUNE BAR

PRESET BARS PWR/VOL KNOB

STEREO INDICATOR

TUNE BAR

SEEK BAR

SCAN BUTTON PWR/VOL KNOB

UPPERDISPLAY

PRESETICONS

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

SCANBUTTON

SEEK BAR

PWR/VOLKNOB

AM/FMBUTTON

PRESETBARS

A.SELBUTTON

SOUNDBUTTON

SOUNDBUTTON

A.SELBUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

STEREOINDICATOR

AUTO SELECTICON

SOUNDICON

SCANICON

EX-L, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System(U.S. Vehicles Only)

０３／０９／０３　１１：４５：１３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１２５　



Playing the Radio

Features 123

STEREO INDICATOR

SEEK BAR

PRESET BARS

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK BAR

SCANBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

UPPERDISPLAY

PRESETICONS

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

EX-L, EX-V6 Modelswithout Navigation System

SCAN BUTTON

TUNEBAR

A.SELBUTTON

SOUND BUTTON

AM/FMBUTTON

STEREO INDICATOR

AM/FMBUTTON


AUDIOSELECTICON

SOUND ICONSCANICON

０３／０９／０３　１１：４５：２１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１２６　



－

－

－

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on by pushing thePWR/VOL knob or the AM/FMbutton. Adjust the volume by turningthe same knob.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it. You will see SCAN inthe display. The system will scan fora station with a strong signal. Whenit finds one, it will stop and play thatstation for about five seconds.

If you do nothing, the system willthen scan for the next strong stationand play it for five seconds. When itplays a station you want to listen to,press the SCAN button again.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, AUTOSELECT, and the preset bars oricons.

Use the TUNE bar orknob to tune the radio to a desiredfrequency. Press the side of thebar or turn the knob to the right totune to a higher frequency, and the

side or turn the knob to the leftto tune to a lower frequency.

The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or side of thebar, then release it.

Pushing the AUDIO DISPLAYbutton will also turn on the system.

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to is displayed.To change bands, press the AM/FMbutton. On the FM band, ST will bedisplayed if the station is broadcast-ing in stereo. Stereo reproduction onAM is not available.

XM Satellite Radio information isavailable on page .145


Playing the Radio

To Play the Radio SCANTo Select a Station

TUNE

SEEK

Features124

０３／０９／０３　１１：４５：３３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１２７　



－－Each preset bar or iconcan store one frequency on AM, andtwo frequencies on FM.

The preset frequencies will be lost ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead, isdisconnected, or the radio fuse isremoved.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbar or icon.

Push the AUDIO DISPLAY buttonto view the preset icons.

Use the TUNE, SEEK, or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Pick the preset number (1 6)you want for that station. Pressthe left or right side of the bar oricon and hold it until you hear abeep.

Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on AM and twelvestations on FM.

1.

2.

3.

4.


Preset

Playing the Radio

Features 125

０３／０９／０３　１１：４５：４３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１２８　



－

－

If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the Auto Select featureto find stations in the local area.

Press the A. SEL button or touch theAuto Select icon. A. SEL will flash inthe display, and the system will gointo scan mode for several seconds.It stores the frequencies of six AM,and twelve FM stations in the presetbars (1 6) or icons. You will see a‘‘0’’ displayed after pressing a presetbar or icon if Auto Select cannot finda strong station for every preset baror icon.

press the A.SEL button or icon. This restores thepresets you originally set.

If you do not like the stations AutoSelect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the preset barsor icons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, orSCAN function to find stations, thenstore them in the preset bars oricons as described previously.

To turn off Auto Select,

AUTO SELECT

Playing the Radio

Features126

０３／０９／０３　１１：４５：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１２９　



－

－

Each mode is shown in the display asit changes. Turn the VOLUME knobor touch the icon to adjust thesetting to your liking. When the levelreaches the center, you will see ‘‘C’’in the display.

Touch the arrows next to the BAS orTRE icons. The adjustment showsyou the current setting.

Touch the left or right bars on thesound grid. Balance is equalizedwhen the vertical lines are centeredon the grid.

Touch the front or rear bars on thesound grid. The fader is equalizedwhen the horizontal lines arecentered on the grid.

The system will automatically returnthe display to the selected audiomode about five seconds after youstop adjusting a mode. On vehicleswith navigation system, touch theRETURN icon to go back to theaudio screen.

Press the SOUND button or icon, orpress the TUNE knob repeatedly todisplay the Bass (BAS), Treble(TRE), Balance (BAL), and Fader(FAD) settings. On vehicles withnavigation system, touch theSOUND icon or press the TUNEknob.

These twomodes adjusts the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,while FAD adjusts the front-to-backstrength.

Use the TRE/BASmodes to adjust the tone to yourliking.

If you want to adjust the sound whilethe radio/CD is playing, push theAUDIO DISPLAY button, then touchthe SOUND icon in the display.

For Vehicles without Navigation System

For Vehicles with Navigation System(U.S. vehicles only)

On Vehicles with Navigation System

Adjusting the Sound

Balance/Fader

Treble/Bass

Playing the Radio

Features 127

０３／０９／０３　１５：４２：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１３０　



Your Honda’s radio can receive thecomplete AM and FM bands.Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band:530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band:87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least tenkilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

How well your Honda’s radioreceives stations is dependent onmany factors, such as the distancefrom the station’s transmitter,nearby large objects, and atmos-pheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

Playing the Radio

Features128

０３／０９／０３　１１：４６：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１３１　



Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

Playing the Radio

Features 129

０３／０９／０３　１１：４６：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１３２　



Playing a CD

Features130

DX and LX Models


PWR/VOL KNOB

PWR/VOLKNOB

EJECT BUTTON

CD SLOT

CD BUTTON RPT BUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

CD SLOT

PWR/VOL KNOB

SEEK/SKIPBAR

SEEK/SKIPBAR

TRACKRPTICON

RANDOMICON

DISCRPTICON

CD LOAD INDICATOR

CD LOADINDICATOR

RDMBUTTON

CDBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

SCAN/RPT BUTTON

RDMBUTTON

CD LOAD INDICATORLOADBUTTON

SCAN BUTTON

CD BUTTON

SCANBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

CD SLOT

EJECT BUTTON

CHANGEDISCBUTTON

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

PRESETBAR

PRESET BAR

EX, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System(U.S. Vehicles Only)

０３／０９／０３　１１：４６：３１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１３３　



Playing a CD

Features 131

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

CD LOADINDICATOR

CD BUTTON

SEEK BAR

PWR/VOLKNOB

LOADBUTTON

CD SLOT

CD LOAD INDICATOR

RANDOMICON

EJECTBUTTON

EX-L, EX-V6 Modelswithout Navigation System

LOAD BUTTON

RPT BUTTON

RDMBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

CD SLOT

PWR/VOL KNOB

CD BUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

CHANGEDISCBUTTON

TRACKRPTICON

DISC RPTICON


０３／０９／０３　１１：４６：３８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１３４　



To load or play CD’s, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON(II) position.

To play the radio when a CD isplaying, press the AM/FM button.Press the CD button again to switchback to the CD player.

Insert a CD into the CD slot. Thedrive will pull the CD in the rest ofthe way to play it. When the systemreaches the end of the disc, it willreturn to the beginning and play thedisc again.

You operate the CD player/CDchanger with the same controls usedfor the radio. To select the CDplayer/CD changer, press the CDbutton. The number of the trackplaying is shown in the display. Withthe in-dash CD changer, the disc andtrack numbers are displayed. Thesystem will continuously play a CDuntil you change modes.

To listen to satellite radio when a CDis playing, press the CD/SAT button.

To play the tape when a CD isplaying, insert a tape in the player(optional). If a tape is in the player,press the AUX button. Press the CDbutton again to switch back to theCD player. The cassette player isoptional on all U.S. models.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, either with the PWR/VOLknob or by turning off the ignition,the disc will stay in the drive. Whenyou turn the system back on, the CDwill begin playing where it left off.

For vehicles with Satellite RadioDX, LX, and LX-G Models in CanadaTo Play a CD

Playing a CD, CD Changer

Features132

０３／０９／０３　１１：４６：４７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１３５　



－－

＋

▲▼

Press the LOAD button until youhear a beep and see ‘‘LOAd’’ in thedisplay.The disc number for an emptyposition is highlighted and the redlight starts blinking.

When the CD load indicator turnsgreen and ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in thescreen again, insert the next CD inthe slot.Repeat steps 1 through 3 until allsix positions are loaded. If you arenot loading all six positions, thesystem begins playing the last CDloaded.

You can also load a CD into an emptyposition while a CD is playing. Selectthe empty position (the disc numberindicator is not highlighted) andpress the appropriate preset bar ortouch a disc icon. The current CDstops playing and starts the loadingsequence. The CD just loaded willplay.

You operate the CD changer withthe same controls used for the radio.The numbers of the disc and trackplaying are shown in the display. Onvehicles with navigation system,these numbers also appear in theupper display.

To select a different disc, press theappropriate side of a preset bar(1 6) or use the Preset 5 (DISC )to select the previous disc or Preset6 (DISC ) to select the next disc insequence. On vehicles withnavigation system, touch theappropriate disc icon or press theor side of the CH/DISC bar. Ifyou select an empty position in theCD changer, the system will try toload the CD in the next available slot.

Insert the disc into the CD slotwhen the green CD load indicatorcomes on. Insert it only abouthalfway; the drive will pull it in therest of the way. You will see‘‘BUSY’’ in the display as the CDload indicator turns red and blinksas the CD is loaded.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

On vehicles with in-dash CD changerFor Vehicle with in-dash CD Changer


Features 133

０３／０９／０３　１１：４６：５７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１３６　



－

－

－

－

－

－

－

To use the controls, press theAUDIO DISPLAY button, the controlicons will appear on the screen.

Press the icon orSCAN button, to get a 10 secondsampling of each track on thecurrent CD. Press the icon or buttonagain to turn it off.

Touch to get a 10second sampling of the first song ofeach disc in the CD changer. Touchthe icon again to turn it off.

Touch tocontinuously play the same song onthe CD. Press the icon again to stopthe function.

Push the toplay the next track on the disc. Pushthe once to replay the track inplay, press twice to replay theprevious track.To remove rapidly within a track,press and hold the , or the

button.

Press to continuouslyreplay a track. You will see RPT inthe display. Press the RPT buttonagain to turn it off.

Press to play thetracks in random order. You will seeRDM in the display. Press the RDMbutton again to return to normal play.

The SCAN functionsamples all the tracks on theselected disc in the order they arerecorded. To activate it, press andrelease the SCAN button. You willsee SCAN in the display, and you willget a 10 second sampling of eachtrack on the selected CD. Press theSCAN button again to get out of thesystem.

For Vehicles without Navigation System EX-L, EX-V6 Models with NavigationSystem

TRACK SCAN

DISC SCAN

TRACK RPT

SEEK/SKIP

REPEAT

RANDOM

SCAN


Features134

０３／０９／０３　１１：４７：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１３７　



－

－

－

To remove the disc currently playing,press the EJECT button. When adisc is removed from a slot, thesystem automatically begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherCD in that position. If you do notremove the disc from the changerwithin 15 seconds, the systemreturns to the previous mode (AM/FM or satellite radio). The disc willreload into the system and willremain there in a pause mode.

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it with theappropriate preset bar or icon. Whenthat CD begins playing, press theeject button. Continue pressing theEJECT button to remove all the discsfrom the changer.

Touch the icon tocontinuously replay the current CD.Touch again to turn it off.

Touch the icon toplay the current CD in random order.Touch again to stop.

Selects an icon andplays the disc.

Press the eject button ( ) toremove the CD. If you eject the CD,but do not remove it from the slot,the system will automatically reloadthe CD after 15 seconds and put it inpause mode. To begin playing, pressthe CD button.

Press the AM/FM or SAT/CDbutton to switch to the radio orsatellite radio while a CD is playing.Press the CD button again to playthe CD.

If a tape is in the optional tape player,press the AUX button to switch tothe tape while a CD is playing. Pressthe CD button again to switch backto the CD player.

If you turn the system off while a CDis playing, the CD will stay in thedrive. When you turn the systemback on, the CD will begin playingwhere it left off.

On models with CD player or changer

EX-L, EX-V6 ModelsEX, EX-V6 ModelsRemoving CD’s from the ChangerDISC RPT

TRACK RDM

CH DISC

To Stop Playing a CD

Features


135

０３／０９／０３　１１：４７：２１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１３８　



－＋

Load the desired CDs in themagazine, and load the magazine inthe changer according to theinstructions that came with the unit.An optional six or eight disc CD

changer is available for your vehiclefrom your Honda dealer.This disc changer uses the samecontrols used for the in-dash CDplayer/changer or the radio.

To select the CD changer, press theCD button. The disc and tracknumbers will be displayed. To selecta different disc, use Preset 5 (DISC

), for a previous disc; or Preset 6(DISC ), to select the next disc insequence.

If you select an empty slot in themagazine, the changer will searchfor the next available CD to load andplay.

On LX model, if there are no CDs inthe changer, the display will flash,and you will have to select anothermode.

DX, LX, LX-V6, and EX models

Operating the Optional CDChanger


Features136

０３／０９／０３　１１：４７：２９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１３９　



If you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a CD player,find the cause in the chart to theright. If you cannot clear the errormessage, take the vehicle to yourHonda dealer.

Error Message SolutionCause

Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check if the disc is inserted correctly in the CDplayer.Make sure the disc is not scratched or damaged.Press the eject button and pull out the disc.Check the disc for damage or deformation.If the CD cannot be pulled out or the errorindication does not disappear after the disc isejected, see your Honda dealer.Do not try to force the disc out of the player.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

or

or

Features

CD Player Error Messages

137

０３／０９／０３　１１：４７：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１４０　



If you see an error message in thedisplay while operating the CDchanger, find the cause in the chartto the right. If you cannot clear theerror message, take the vehicle to aHonda dealer.

Cause Solution

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

No CD in the CDChangerHigh Temperature

Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Hondadealer.Press the CD eject button and pull out the CDs.Check for an error indication. Insert the CDsagain. If the code does not disappear or theCDs cannot be pulled out, consult your Hondadealer.Insert CDs.

Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Error Message

CD Changer Error Messages

Features138

０３／０９／０３　１１：４７：４７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１４１　



When using CD-R discs, use onlyhigh quality CDs labeled for audiouse.

When recording a CD-R, therecording must be closed for it tobe used by the CD players.

CD-RW discs will not work in thisunit.

Play only standard round CDs.Odd-shaped CDs may jam in thedrive or cause other problems.

When a CD is not being played, storeit in its case to protect it from dustand other contamination. To preventwarpage, keep CDs out of directsunlight and extreme heat.

To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the CD from the centerto the outside edge.

A new CD may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on the re-cording surface of the CD, causingskipping or other problems. Removethese pieces by rubbing the innerand outer edges with the side of apencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe CD player or the magazine.

Handle a CD by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the CD.These, along with contaminationfrom fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tippens, can cause the CD to not playproperly, or possibly jam in the drive.

Handle your CDs properly toprevent damage and skipping. Seethis page.

General Information Protecting CDs

Protecting Your CDs

Features 139

０３／０９／０３　１１：４８：０１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１４２　



Features

Playing a Tape (U.S. Vehicles)

140

DX and LX Models


PWR/VOL KNOB

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

CD/AUXBUTTON

RPTBUTTON

RPT INDICATOR

TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

CD/AUXBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

PRESET BARS

RPTBUTTON

RPT INDICATOR

CD/AUXBUTTON

SEEK/SKIPBAR

PWR/VOLKNOB

PROG ICON NR ICONRPT ICON

RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTION INDICATOR

SEEK/SKIPBAR

SEEK/SKIPBAR

EX, EX-V6 Models with Navigation System

CH/DISCBAR


PRESET BARS

０３／０９／０３　１１：４８：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１４３　




Features 141

PWR/VOL KNOB

UPPERDISPLAY

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

SEEK BAR

CD/AUXBUTTON

SEEK BAR

RPT INDICATOR TAPE DIRECTIONINDICATOR

RPTBUTTON

CD/SAT RADIOBUTTON

PWR/VOLKNOB

RPT INDICATOR

NR ICONRPT ICONPROG ICON

TUNE/SOUNDKNOB

All U.S. EX Leather Interior Modelswithout Navigation System


CH/DISCBAR

All U.S. EX Leather Interior Models with Navigation System

PRESET BARS

０３／０９／０３　１１：４８：１７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１４４　



▲

＊

＊

The ignition switch must be inACCESSORY (I) or ON (II). Makesure the open side of the tape isfacing right, then insert the tapemost of the way into the slot. Thesystem will pull the tape in the restof the way, and begin to play it.

The tape direction indicator will lightto show you which side of the tape isplaying. The indicates the sideyou inserted upward in now playing.If you want to play the other side,press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)side of the preset bar or press theAUDIO DISPLAY button and touchthe PROG icon. When the playerreaches the end of the tape, it willautomatically reverse direction andplay the other side.

Dolby noise reduction turns onwhen you insert a tape. The

indicator will light in thedisplay. If the tape was not recordedin Dolby, turn it off by pressing thePreset 4 (NR) side of the preset baror touching the NR icon. Dolbyremains off until you press thepreset bar or the icon again.

Dolby noise reductionmanufactured under license fromDolby laboratories licensingCorporation. ‘‘Dolby’’ and thedouble-D symbol are trademarksof the Dolby LaboratoriesLicensing Corporation.

To remove the tape, press theEJECT button on the cassette player.If you want to turn the player off,press the PWR/VOL knob or turnoff the ignition. The tape will remainin the drive.When you turn the system back on,the tape player will be in pause mode.Press the Preset 3 (PLAY/PROG)side of the preset bar or touch thePROG icon on vehicles withnavigation system to resume play.

To switch to the radio or CD playerwhile a tape is playing, press theAM/FM, or CD/AUX button or CD/SAT RADIO button. To change backto the tape player, push the CD/AUXbutton or CD/SAT RADIO button.

Optional on all U.S. modelsTo Play a Tape To Stop Playing a Tape


Features142

０３／０９／０３　１１：４８：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１４５　



－

▲

▼

－

－▲

▼

－

To rewind the tape,push the Preset 1 (REW) side of thepreset bar or the upper side ( ) ofthe CH DISC bar. You will see REWin the display. To fast forward thetape, push the Preset 2 (FF) side ofthe preset bar. You will see FF dis-played. Press the Preset 1, 2, or 3side of the bars or the lower side( ) of the CH DISC bar to take thesystem out of rewind or fast forward.

Press side to find thebeginning of the current song orpassage. Press side to find thebeginning of the next song orpassage. When the system reachesthe beginning of a song or passage, itbegins to play it.

To rewind the tapepush the upper side ( ) of the CHDISC bar. To fast forward the tape,push the lower side ( ) of the CHDISC bar. Press either side of thePROG icon in the audio display totake the system out of rewind or fastforward.

Press the RPT buttonor icon to continuously play a song orpassage. You will see RPT displayed.The track will repeat until you pressthe RPT button or icon again.

The SKIP and REPEATfunctions use silent periods on thetape to find the end of a song orpassage. These features may notwork if there is almost no gapbetween selections, a high noiselevel, or a silent period in the middleof a selection.

If you see the error message‘‘ ’’ on the display, press thetape eject button to remove the tapefrom the unit. Make sure the tape isnot damaged. If the tape will noteject or the error message stays onafter the tape ejects, take yourvehicle to your Honda dealer.

Vehicles with Navigation System

EX and EX-V6 with Navigation System

Tape Search FunctionsFF/REW

SKIP

FF/REW

REPEAT


Features 143

NOTE:

０３／０９／０３　１１：４８：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１４６　



If the tape is loose, tighten it byturning the hub with a pencil or yourfinger. If the label is peeling off,remove it or it could cause the tapeto jam in the player. Never try toinsert a warped or damaged tape inthe player.

Store tapes in their cases to protectthem from dust and moisture. Neverplace tapes where they will beexposed to direct sunlight, high heat,or high humidity. If a tape is exposedto extreme heat or cold, let it reach amoderate temperature beforeinserting it into the player.

Never try to insert foreign objectinto the tape player.

The tape player picks up dirt andoxides from the tape. Thiscontamination builds up over timeand cause the sound quality todegrade. To prevent this, you shouldclean the player after every 30 hoursof use.

If you do not clean the tape playerregularly, it may eventually becomeimpossible to remove thecontamination with a normalcleaning kit. Your Honda dealer hasa cleaning kit available.

Use 100-minute or shorter tapes.Tapes longer than that may break orjam the drive.

Caring for the Tape and Player


Features144

０３／０９／０３　１１：４８：４３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１４７　



Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States except Hawaii, Alaska,and Canada.

XM is a registered trademark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

Satellite radio is available in U.S.models only.

EX-L and EX-V6 ModelsSatellite Digital Radio

Features

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

145

DISPBUTTON

SAT RADIOBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

TUNEKNOB

All U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 Modelswithout Navigation System

All U.S. EX-L and EX-V6 Modelswith Navigation System

TUNEBARSEEK/

SKIP/BAR

CATEGORY/CHANNELMODE INDICATOR

CATEGORY/CHANNELMODE INDICATOR

MODE ICON

SCAN ICON

SEEK/SKIP/BAR

PWR/VOLKNOB

SAT RADIOBUTTON

PWR/VOL KNOB

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

PRESETBARS

PRESETICONS

TM

TM

０３／０９／０３　１１：４８：５４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１４８　



－－The ignition must be in theACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.Turn the system on:

Push any of the following: PWR/VOL knob, the CD/SAT, or AUDIObutton.

Push any of the following: PWR/VOL knob or the CD/SAT button.

Turn the PWR/VOL knob to adjustthe volume.

When in the satellite radio mode,you can use any of three methods tofind channels: TUNE, SEEK/SKIP(CATEGORY), and SCAN.

Press the TUNE bar to changechannel selections. Press forhigher numbered channels and

for lower numbered channels.

Turn the TUNE knob to changechannels. Turn the knob right forhigher numbered channels and leftfor lower numbered channels.

Press and release this button tochange the display. The display willchange in the following sequence:channel name, channel number,category, artist name, and music title.


Vehicles without Navigation System


Vehicles without Navigation System

Vehicles with Navigation SystemTo Play XM Satellite Radio

To Select a Channel

TUNEDISP


Features146

TM

TM

０３／０９／０３　１１：４９：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１４９　



－－

－

CONTINUED

TheSEEK/SKIP function selects thevarious categories in XM, such asJazz/Blues, Rock, Classical, etc.Push the to change thecategory forward. Push the tochange the category backward. Tosearch for channels within acategory, turn the TUNE knobclockwise or press the TUNE bar

.

The SCAN functionsamples all channels for 5 seconds.To activate the function, push theSCAN button. Push it again to getout of the sequence.

Each preset icon or buttoncan store one channel in XM1 andone in XM2.

Push the SAT button, you will seeXM1 or XM2.Use the TUNE, SEEK or SCANfunction to tune the radio to adesired channel.Pick a preset icon or button andhold it until you hear a beep.Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a totalof six stations on XM1 and XM2.

Once your XM channels are preset,pressing the CH DISC button willselect your preset channels.

1.

2.

3.

4.



Features

SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) SCAN

Preset

147

TM

０３／０９／０３　１１：４９：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１５０　



Satellite radio receives signals fromtwo satellites to produce clear, high-quality digital reception. It offersmany channels in several categories.Along with a large selection ofdifferent types of music, satelliteradio also allows you to view channeland category selections in the audiodisplay.

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas. Satellite signalsare more likely to be blocked by tallbuildings and mountains the farthernorth you travel from the equator.


Features

Satellite Radio Signals

148

Signal may beblocked bymountains orlarge obstaclesto the south.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

TM

０３／０９／０３　１１：４９：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１５１　



Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on an east/west road witha mountain on the south side ofthe road.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you

Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road

Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff or hill to the southof you

Driving in the tunnels

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or ON (II) position, push thePWR/VOL knob to turn on the audiosystem and press the CD/SATbutton. A variety of music types andstyles will play.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

CONTINUED

Receiving Satellite Radio Service


Features 149

TM

０３／０９／０３　１１：４９：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１５２　



While awaiting activation, make sureyour vehicle remains in an open areawith good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the displayand you will be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

If you decide to purchase XMSatellite Radio service, contact XMRadio at www.xmradio.com, or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number.

Turn the TUNE knob until ‘‘0’’appears in the display. Your IDnumber will appear in the display.

After you have registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSAT Radio mode while you awaitactivation. This should take about 30minutes.


Features

To get your XM Satellite radio IDnumber:

150

TM

０３／０９／０３　１１：４９：４７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１５３　



▲ ▼

＋－

＋－

＋

－

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button and hold ituntil the desired volume is reached,then release it.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM1, XM2, or CD (if a CD is loaded).

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change station.Each time you press the button up( ) or down ( ), the system goesto the next preset station on theband you are listening to.

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

If you are playing a CD, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit twice to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the display.

If you are playing a tape in theoptional cassette player, press thetop ( ) of the CH button to advanceto the next selection. Press thebottom ( ) to go back to theprevious selection. The systemsenses a silent period, then resumesplaying.

On all EX models and V6 models

Steering Wheel Controls

Features 151

CH BUTTONVOL BUTTON

MODE BUTTON

０３／０９／０３　１１：４９：５６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１５４　



－

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. If thishappens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in thefrequency display the next time youturn on the system. Use the presetbuttons to enter the five-digit code.The code is located on the radio codecard included in your Owner’sManual kit. When it is enteredcorrectly, the radio will start playing.

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code usingthe preset bars or the TUNE knob.Because there are hundreds ofnumber combinations possible fromthe five-digit, making the systemwork without knowing the exactcode is nearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in thisOwner’s Manual.

If you should happen to lose the card,you must obtain the code numberfrom a Honda dealer. To do this, youwill need the system’s serial number.

You will have to store your favoritestations on each side of the presetbars (1 6) after the system beginsworking. Your original settings werelost when power was disconnected.

If ‘‘0’’ is not the first digit in yourcode, turn the TUNE knob left orright until the first digit is displayed.Press and release the TUNE knob tostore it. Enter the remaining digits

the same way.

If ‘‘0’’ is the first digit in your code,press and release the TUNE knob tostore it.

If your vehicle is equipped with anavigation system, press and releasethe TUNE knob; the number ‘‘0’’appears on the display.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have ten tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in ten attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If the code card is lost, a Hondadealer can access your code with theyour radio’s serial number. Toaccess the serial number, turn theradio on. It must display ‘‘CODE’’,then turn the radio off. Push thepreset 1, preset 6, and power buttonsat the same time, then quicklyrelease.

On EX and EX-V6 models

Radio Theft Protection

Features152

０３／０９／０３　１１：５０：０７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１５５　



On models without Navigation System

On models with Navigation System

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, you willneed to set the clock.

You can quickly set the time to thenearest hour. Pressing and holdingthe SOUND button, then pressingthe R (Preset 6) side of the bar setsthe clock back to the previous hour.If the displayed time is after the halfhour, the clock sets the clockforward to the beginning of the nexthour.

For example:1:06 would RESET to 1:00.1:52 would RESET to 2:00.

Refer to the Navigation SystemOwner’s Manual to set up the time.

Press and hold the SOUND button.Change the hours by pressing theuntil you hear a beep. The displayedtime begins to blink H (Preset 4)side of the bar until the numbersadvance to the desired time. Changethe minutes by pressing the M(Preset 5) side of the bar until thenumbers advance to the desired time.When you are finished, press theSOUND button again to set the time.

Setting the Clock

Features 153

DIGITAL CLOCK

SOUND BUTTON

PRESET BARS

EX, EX-V6 and LX-V6 Modelswithout Navigation System shown

０３／０９／０３　１１：５０：１７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１５６　



The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights and taillights flashes ifsomeone attempts to break into yourvehicle or remove the radio. Thisalarm continues for two minutes,then the system resets. To reset analarming system before the twominutes have elapsed, unlock eitherfront door with the key or theremote transmitter.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, hood, and trunk. For thesystem to activate, you must lock thedoors from the outside with the key,lock tab, door lock switch, or remotetransmitter. The security systemlight on the instrument panel startsblinking immediately to show youthe system is setting itself.

Once the security system is set,opening any door (without using thekey or the remote transmitter), thehood, or the trunk will cause it tosound. It also sounds if the radio isremoved from the dashboard or thewiring is cut.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the master keyor the remote transmitter withouttriggering the alarm. The alarm willsound if the trunk lock is forced, orthe trunk is opened with the trunkrelease handle.

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door Monitor on theinstrument panel (see page ), tosee if the doors and trunk are fullyclosed. Since it is not part of themonitor display, manually check thehood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

61

On EX, all V6, and Canadian LX-Gmodels

Security System

Features154

SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT

０３／０９／０３　１１：５０：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１５７　



Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Push in the Cruise Control MasterButton on the steering wheel. TheCRUISE MAIN light on theinstrument panel comes on.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL light onthe instrument panel comes on toshow the system is now activated.

1.

2.

3.Except for U.S. DX model Using the Cruise Control

Cruise Control

Features 155

CRUISE CONTROL MASTER BUTTON

CANCELBUTTON

RES/ACCELBUTTON

DECEL/SETBUTTONImproper use of the cruise

control can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

０３／０９／０３　１１：５０：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１５８　



The cruise control may not hold theset speed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This will cancel thecruise control. To resume the setspeed, press the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will come back on.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal. Ac-celerate to the desired cruisingspeed and press the DECEL/SETbutton.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed upabout 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton repeatedly. Each time youdo this, your vehicle will slowdown about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).

Tap the brake or clutch pedallightly with your foot. TheCRUISE CONTROL light on theinstrument panel will go out.When the car slows to the desiredspeed, press the DECEL/SETbutton.

Even with the cruise control turnedon, you can still use the acceleratorpedal to speed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

Resting your foot on the brake orclutch pedal will cause the cruisecontrol to cancel.

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features156

０３／０９／０３　１１：５０：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１５９　



When you push the CANCEL button,or tap the brake or clutch pedal, thesystem will remember thepreviously-set cruising speed. Toreturn to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h) then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL light comeson. The vehicle will accelerate to thesame cruising speed as before.

Pressing the Cruise Control MasterSwitch turns the system off anderases the previous cruising speed.

You can cancel the cruise control inany of these ways:

Tap the brake or clutch pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Press the Cruise Control MasterSwitch.

Cancelling the Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed

Cruise Control

Features 157

０３／０９／０３　１１：５０：５６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１６０　



The HomeLink UniversalTransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remote controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

The HomeLink Transceiver storesthe code in a permanent memory.There should be no need to retrainHomeLink if your vehicle’s batterygoes dead or is disconnected.

If your garage door opener wasmanufactured before April 1982, youmay not be able to programHomeLink Universal Transceiver tooperate it. They do not have a safetyfeature that causes the motor to stopand reverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLinkopening. If you do not have thisinformation, contact themanufacturer of the equipment.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls .

On EX-V6 model

General Information


HomeLink Universal Transceiver

Features158

TM

０３／０９／０３　１１：５１：０５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１６１　



－

Press and hold the remote controlbutton and one of the HomeLinkbuttons at the same time.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button. To do this,press and hold the two outsidebuttons on HomeLink Transceiverfor about 20 seconds, or until the redlight flashes. Release the buttons,then proceed to Step 1.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to Step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the house current.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote control 2 to 5inches from HomeLink. Makesure you are not blocking yourview of the red light in HomeLink.

2.

3.

1.

CONTINUED

Training HomeLinkBefore you begin


Features 159

０３／０９／０３　１１：５１：１５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１６２　



Canadian Owners: The remote controlyou are training from may stop trans-mitting after two seconds. This is notenough for HomeLink to learn thecode. Release and press the buttonon the remote control every twoseconds until HomeLink has learnedthe code.

The red light in HomeLink shouldbegin flashing. It will flash slowlyat first, then rapidly.

When the red light flashes rapidly,release both buttons. HomeLinkshould have learned the code fromthe remote control.

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkTransceiver button by pushing it.

If the button does not work, repeatthis procedure to train it again. If itstill does not work, you may have avariable or rolling code garagedoor opener. See if you do bypressing and holding theHomeLink transceiver button youjust trained. If the red light blinksfor two seconds, then stays on,you have a rolling code garagedoor opener. Go to ‘‘Training Witha Rolling Code System’’.

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so they send andreceive the correct codes.

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other remotely-controlled devices around yourhome (lighting, automatic gate,security system, etc.).

5.

6. 8.

7.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem


Features160

０３／０９／０３　１１：５１：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１６３　



－

－

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Press the Training button on thegarage door opener unit until thelight next to the button comes on,then release it. The light may blink,or come on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 4 seconds.This should turn off the traininglight on the garage door openerunit. (Some systems may requireyou to press the button up to threetimes.)

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.


Features 161

TRAINING BUTTON

０３／０９／０３　１１：５１：３３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１６４　



To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the red lightbegins to flash, then release thebuttons.

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To train an already programmedtransceiver button with a new device,you do not have to erase all thememory. Train the selected buttonover the existing memory codefollowing the steps under

.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Wireless ControlSystem, or would like information onhome products that can be operatedby the transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On the Internet, go to www.homelink.com.




Erasing Codes

Retraining a Button

TrainingHomeLink

Customer Assistance


Features162

０３／０９／０３　１１：５１：４３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１６５　



Before you begin driving your Honda,you should know what gasoline touse, and how to check the levels ofimportant fluids. You also need toknow how to properly store luggageor packages. The information in thissection will help you. If you plan toadd any accessories to your vehicle,please read the information in thissection first.

.............................Break-in Period . 164...............................Gasoline Type . 164

.........Service Station Procedures . 165....................................Refueling . 165

Opening and Closing the.......................................Hood . 166

...................................Oil Check . 168.............Engine Coolant Check . 169

...............................Fuel Economy . 170........Improving Fuel Economy . 170

....................................Accessories . 171.................................Modifications . 172

...........Modifying Your Vehicle . 172.............................Carrying Cargo . 173

..Carrying Cargo in the Trunk . 175Carrying Cargo in the

.....Passenger Compartment . 175

Before Driving

Before Driving 163

０３／０９／０３　１１：５１：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１６６　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Your Honda is designed to operateon unleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane number of 86 or higher. Useof a lower octane gasoline can causea persistent, heavy, metallic rappingnoise in the engine that can lead tomechanical failure.

We recommend gasolines containingdetergent additives that help preventfuel system and engine deposits.

Using gasoline containing lead willdamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols. This contributes to airpollution.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.

Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the Malfunction IndicatorLamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized Honda dealer forservice.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10 percent ethanolby volume and up to 15 percentMTBE by volume. Do not usegasoline containing methanol.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to yourQuick Start Guide.

Break-in Period, Gasoline Type

Before Driving

Break-in Period Gasoline Type

164

０３／０９／０３　１１：５２：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１６７　



Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.The fuel fill cap is attached to thefuel filler with a tether. Put theattachment on the fuel fill cap intothe slit on the fuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Consult your dealer.

Park with the driver’s side closestto the gas pump.

Open the fuel fill door by pullingon the handle to the left of thedriver’s seat.

3.

4.

1.

2.

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off

CONTINUED

Service Station Procedure

Before Driving

Refueling

165

FUEL FILL CAP

Push

TETHER

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Stop the engine and keepheat, sparks, and flamesaway.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

０３／０９／０３　１１：５２：１３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１６８　



To Open the Hood:Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease handle located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least three times.If you do not properly tighten thecap, the Malfunction IndicatorLamp may come on (see page

).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

Put your fingers under the frontedge of the hood to the right ofthe center. Slide your hand to theleft until you feel the hood latchhandle. Push this handle up torelease it. Lift up the hood.

If the hood latch handle moves stiffly,or if you can open the hood withoutlifting the handle, the mechanismshould be cleaned and lubricated.

1.2.

5.

6.

260


Before Driving

Opening and Closing the Hood

166

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE LATCH

０３／０９／０３　１１：５２：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１６９　



Pull the support rod out of its clipand insert the end into the hole onthe front of the hood near thecenter.

To Close the Hood:

Lift it up slightly to remove thesupport rod from the hole. Put thesupport rod back into its holding clip.Lower the hood to about a foot (30

cm) above the fender, then let itdrop. Make sure it is securelylatched.

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

Lower it to about a foot (30 cm)above the fender, then press downfirmly with your hands. Make sure it

is securely latched.

To Close the Hood:

3. 4-cylinder models

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models


Before Driving 167

SUPPORT ROD

０３／０９／０３　１１：５２：３４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１７０　



Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick.

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its hole.

Remove the dipstick again andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lower mark,see on page .

1.

2.

3.

4.

214


Before Driving

Oil Check

Adding Oil

168

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models

DIPSTICK(Orange Handle)

DIPSTICK(Orange Loop) 4-cylinder models

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

０３／０９／０３　１１：５２：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１７１　



Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page forinformation on adding the propercoolant.

Refer toon page for information

on checking other items in yourHonda.

219

203


Before Driving

Engine Coolant Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Owner’s MaintenanceChecks

169

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

RESERVE TANK

4-cylinder models

MIN

MAX

MAX RESERVE TANK

6-cylinder models MIN6-cylinder models

０３／０９／０３　１１：５２：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１７２　



Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use the cruise control whenappropriate.

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceschedule. See

(see page).

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering andhard braking use more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses fuel.

203

For example,

Before Driving

Improving Fuel Economy

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Fuel Economy

170

０３／０９／０３　１１：５３：０５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１７３　



Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withproper operation.

Have the installer contact yourHonda dealer for assistance beforeinstalling any electronic accessory.When properly installed, cellular

phones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas the SRS and anti-lock brakesystem.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Honda accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Honda accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although aftermarket accessoriesmay fit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability (see‘‘Modifications’’ on page foradditional information).

172

265

Accessories

Before Driving

Accessories

171

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

０３／０９／０３　１１：５３：１５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１７４　



Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Honda (aftermarket) componentscould seriously affect your vehicle’shandling, stability, and reliability.

Some examples are:Lowering the vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Raising your vehicle with anaftermarket suspension kit canaffect the handling and stability.

Aftermarket wheels, because theyare a universal design, can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents.

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Do not modify your steering wheelor any other part of yourSupplemental Restraint System.Modifications could make thesystem ineffective. See the safetyprecautions on page .

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your Honda dealer.

Any objectattached to or placed on the coversmarked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in thecenter of the steering wheel andon top of the dashboard, couldinterfere with the proper operationof the airbags. Or, if the airbagsinflate, the objects could bepropelled inside the vehicle and

hurt someone.

If a side airbagor a side curtain airbag inflates, acup holder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

This could prevent theairbag from inflating properly.

6

On models equipped with side airbags orside curtain airbags

Modifications

Before Driving

Modifying Your Vehicle

Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a front door.

Do not place any objects over orreplace the outside edge of a frontseat-back.

172

０３／０９／０３　１１：５３：２８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１７５　



Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove box

Door and seat-back pockets

Trunk, including the back seatswhen folded down

Center pocket

Console compartment (on somemodels)

Roof-rack (if installed)

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

CONTINUED

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving 173

GLOVE BOXSEAT-BACK POCKET

CENTER POCKET

DOOR POCKET

CONSOLECOMPARTMENT

TRUNK

０３／０９／０３　１１：５３：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１７６　



×

－

For example, if there will be four 150lbs (70 kg) occupants in your vehicle,the amount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 250 lbs (115kg).4 150 lbs (70 kg) = 600 lbs (280kg)850 lbs (395 kg) 600 lbs (280 kg) =250 lbs (115 kg)

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, the load from your trailerwill be transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

Determine the combined weightof accessories, luggage, and cargobeing loaded in the vehicle. Theweight may not safely exceed theavailable cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4 [250lbs (115 kg) in this example].

To determine the correct cargo andluggage load limit:

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850 lbs(395 kg)’’ on your vehicle’s placard(on the driver’s doorjamb).

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in the vehicle.(Five is seating capacity of yourvehicle.)

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 lbs (395 kg).

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (395 kg). This figureincludes the total weight of alloccupants, cargo, accessories, andthe tongue weight if you are towing atrailer.

1.

2.5.

6.

3.

4.

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving174

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

０３／０９／０３　１１：５３：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１７７　



The total weight must not exceedthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR). The load for the front andrear axles also must not exceed theGross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)(see page ).

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals or seat operation.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed 165 lbs (75 kg).

If you use an accessory roof rack,the roof rack weight limit may belower. Refer to the information thatcame with your roof rack.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you fold down the back seat, tiedown items that could be thrownabout the vehicle during a crash orsudden stop.

56195

Carrying Cargo

Before Driving

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk

carbon monoxidepoisoning

175

０３／０９／０３　１１：５４：０１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１７８　



This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate the5-speed manual and automatictransmissions. It also includesimportant information on parkingyour vehicle, the braking system, theTraction Control System, and factsyou need if you are planning to tow atrailer.

........................Preparing to Drive . 178.......................Starting the Engine . 179

....5-speed Manual Transmission . 180.....Recommended Shift Points . 181

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 181

..............Automatic Transmission . 182Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 182.......................................Shifting . 182

..............Engine Speed Limiter . 184....................Shift Lock Release . 185

...........................................Parking . 187.............................Braking System . 188

...............Brake System Design . 188.............Brake Wear Indicators . 188...........Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) . 189

Activating the Anti-lock................................Brakes . 189

........................ABS Indicator . 189..............Traction Control System . 191...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 192

.........TCS Activation Indicator . 192...........................Towing a Trailer . 194

Driving

Driving 177

０３／０９／０３　１１：５４：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１８０　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepage ).

Make sure the doors are securelyclosed and locked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicator lights inthe instrument panel (see page

).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Check the seat adjustment (seepages and ).

3.

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

15

9.

61

98

92 93

78

Preparing to Drive

Driving178

０３／０９／０３　１１：５４：２２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１８１　



Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Turn the ignition key to theSTART (III) position. Do not holdthe key in START (III) for morethan 15 seconds at a time. If theengine does not start right away,pause for at least 10 secondsbefore trying again.

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. Returnto step 5 if the engine does notstart.

Push the clutch pedal down all theway.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Starting the Engine

Driving 179

NOTICE: The engine is harder to startin cold weather. Also, the thinner airf ound at altitudes above 8,000 f eet(2,400 meters) adds to this problem.

０３／０９／０３　１１：５４：３３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１８２　



The manual transmission is syn-chronized in all forward gears forsmooth operation. It has a lockout soyou cannot shift directly from Fifthto Reverse. When shifting up ordown, make sure you push the clutchpedal down all the way, shift to thenext gear, and let the pedal upgradually. When you are not shifting,do not rest your foot on the clutchpedal. This can cause your clutch towear out faster.

Come to a full stop before you shiftinto Reverse. You can damage thetransmission by trying to shift intoReverse with the vehicle moving.Push down the clutch pedal, andpause for a few seconds beforeshifting into Reverse, or shift intoone of the forward gears for amoment. This stops the gears sothey won’t ‘‘grind.’’

When slowing down, you can getextra braking from the engine byshifting to a lower gear. This extrabraking can help you maintain a safespeed and prevent your brakes fromoverheating while going down asteep hill. Before downshifting,make sure engine speed will not gointo the tachometer’s red zone in thelower gear.

5-speed Manual Transmission

Driving180

Rapid slowing or speeding-upcan cause loss of control onslippery surfaces. If you crash,you can be injured.

Use extra care when driving onslippery surfaces.

０３／０９／０３　１１：５４：４０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１８３　



Drive in the highest gear that letsthe engine run and acceleratesmoothly. This will give you the bestfuel economy and effective emis-sions control. The following shiftpoints are recommended:

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

Shift up

1st to 2nd2nd to 3rd3rd to 4th4th to 5th

Normal acceleration

15 mph (25 km/h)25 mph (40 km/h)40 mph (65 km/h)50 mph (80 km/h)


Driving

Recommended Shift Points Engine Speed Limiter

181

０３／０９／０３　１１：５４：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１８４　



These indicators between the tacho-meter and speedometer show whichposition the shift lever is in.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to ON (II). If itflashes while driving (in any shiftposition), it indicates a possibleproblem in the transmission.

To shift from any position, press therelease button on the side of theshift lever to move it. You cannotshift out of Park when the ignitionswitch is in LOCK (0) orACCESSORY (I).

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration andhave the transmission checked by aHonda dealer as soon as possible.

To shift from:P to R

R to PN to RD to 22 to 11 to 2

2 to DD to DD to ND to DN to DR to N

Do this:Press the brake pedal andpress the release button.

Press the release button.

Move the lever.

3

3

3

3

Automatic Transmission

Driving

Shift Lever Position Indicators

Shifting

182

SHIFT LEVER

０３／０９／０３　１１：５４：５８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１８５　



－－

－

－

－

This position mechani-cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal. Press the releasebutton on the side of the shift leverto move it.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

You must also press the releasebutton to shift into Park. To avoidtransmission damage, come to acomplete stop before shifting intoPark. The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you can remove the key fromthe ignition switch.

Press the brakepedal and press the release button toshift from Park to Reverse. To shiftfrom Reverse to Neutral, come to acomplete stop and then shift.

Use Neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from Neutral toanother gear.

This position is similarto D, except only the first threegears are selected instead of all five.Use D when towing a trailer in hillyterrain, or to provide engine brakingwhen going down a steep hill. D canalso keep the transmission fromcycling between third and fourthgears in stop-and-go driving.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear for the vehicle speedand acceleration. You may notice thetransmission shifting up at higherspeeds when the engine is cold. Thishelps the engine warm up faster.

185

3

3

CONTINUED


Driving

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Neutral (N)

Drive (D )

Drive (D)

3

183

０３／０９／０３　１１：５５：０７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１８６　



－－This position locksthe transmission in second gear. Itdoes not downshift to first gearwhen you come to a stop.

Use Second gear:

For starting out on a slipperysurface or in deep snow.

To help reduce wheel spin.

When driving downhill with atrailer.

To shift from Second toFirst, press the release button on theside of the shift lever. With the leverin this position, the transmissionlocks in First gear. By upshifting anddownshifting through 1, 2, D , and D,you can operate this transmissionmuch like a manual transmissionwithout a clutch pedal.

If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce theRPM below the red zone.

For more power when climbing.

To increase engine braking whengoing down steep hills.

3


Driving

Second (2) First (1) Engine Speed Limiter

184

０３／０９／０３　１１：５５：１７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１８７　



Put a cloth on the edge of the ShiftLock Release slot cover next tothe shift lever. Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver or finger nailfile to remove the cover. Carefullypry off the edge of the cover.

Insert the key in the Shift LockRelease slot.This allows you to move the shift

lever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal and pressing the releasebutton does not work.

Remove the key from the ignitionswitch.

Set the Parking brake.1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED


Driving

Shift Lock Release

185

COVER

０３／０９／０３　１１：５５：２７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１８８　



Push down on the key while youpress the release button on theshift lever and move the shift leverout of Park to Neutral.

Remove the key from the ShiftLock Release slot, then reinstallthe cover. Make sure the notch onthe cover is on the left side.Depress the brake pedal andrestart the engine.

If you need to use the Shift LockRelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by a Honda dealer.

5.

6.


Driving186

RELEASEBUTTON

SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

０３／０９／０３　１１：５５：３４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１８９　



Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

If your vehicle has an automatictransmission, set the parking brakebefore you put the transmission inPark. This keeps the vehicle frommoving and putting pressure on theparking mechanism in thetransmission.

Make sure the moonroof (ifequipped) and the windows areclosed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors with the key or theremote transmitter.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in first gear.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb. If your vehicle has a manualtransmission, put it in reverse gear.

On EX, LX-V6, and Canadian LX-Gmodels

Driving

Parking Tips

Parking

187

０３／０９／０３　１１：５５：４６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１９０　



Your Honda is equipped with discbrakes. The brakes on the rearwheels may be disc or drum,depending on the model. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. The ABS helpsyou retain steering control whenbraking very hard.

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectiveness.It also keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Braking System

Driving

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

188

Front

０３／０９／０３　１１：５５：５６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１９１　



The Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

The ABS also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution accordingto vehicle loading.

this defeats the purpose of the ABS.Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal as you steer away fromthe hazard. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

If the ABS indicator comes on, theanti-lock function of the brakingsystem has shut down. The brakesstill work like a conventional system,but without anti-lock. You shouldhave the dealer inspect your vehicleas soon as possible.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on togetherand the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also be shutdown.

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

You should never pump the brake pedal;

CONTINUED

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Activating the Anti-lock Brakes ABS Indicator

189

０３／０９／０３　１１：５６：０６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１９２　



Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your Honda dealer assoon as possible. Avoid sudden hardbraking which could cause the rearwheels to lock up and possibly leadto a loss of control.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

It only helps with the

steering control during braking.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock. Slow down and allow a greaterdistance between vehicles underthose conditions.

If the ABS indicator and the brakesystem indicator come on togetherand the parking brake is fullyreleased, the front-to-rear brakingdistribution system may also be shutdown.

The TCS indicator will come onalong with the ABS indicator.

Test your brakes as instructed onpage . If the brakes feel normal,drive slowly and have your vehiclerepaired by your Honda dealer assoon as possible. Avoid sudden hardbraking which could cause the rearwheels to lock up and possibly leadto a loss of control.262

262

On all V6 models

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

Driving

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

ABS cannot prevent a loss ofstability.

A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

Important Safety Reminders

190

ABS INDICATOR

０３／０９／０３　１１：５６：１８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１９３　



Your Honda is equipped with aTraction Control System (TCS) toassist you in maintaining tractionwhile driving slowly on loose orslippery surfaces.

TCS monitors the speed of all fourwheels. When it senses a front wheellosing traction, it applies braking tothat wheel. The TCS Activationindicator flashes when this occurs.

Driving with TCS requires no specialskills or technique. The TCS doesnot control your vehicle’s wholebraking system and cannot preventskidding if you enter a corner toofast. It is still your responsibility todrive at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

When starting out or driving on aloose or slippery road surface, youmay notice that the vehicle does notrespond to the accelerator in thesame way it does at other times. Thisis a sign TCS is activating. You willsee the TCS Activation indicatorlight flash.

The TCS indicator (see page )and the TCS Activation indicatorcome on and stay on when there is aproblem with the TCS.

You should still install winter tires onyour vehicle during the winter. Makesure to use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Exercisethe same caution in winter driving asyou would if your vehicle was notequipped with TCS.

Driving with the compact spare tireinstalled (see page ) mayactivate the TCS. You should turn offthe system.

64

248

On LX-V6 and EX-V6 models

Traction Control System

Driving 191

TCS ACTIVATION INDICATOR

TCS INDICATOR

０３／０９／０３　１１：５６：２７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１９４　



This switch is under the side vent. Itlets you turn the Traction ControlSystem on and off. You cannot turnoff the TCS while the TCS Activationlight is flashing.

The Traction Control System turnson every time you start the engine,even if you turned it off the last timeyou drove the vehicle.

The TCS indicator comes on orflashes under the following condi-tions:

When you turn the ignition switchto ON (II).

When you manually turn off TCS.

It flashes when TCS is regulatingwheelspin.

If the system’s diagnostics sensesa problem with TCS, the indicatorwill come on and stay on alongwith the TCS indicator.

Deactivate the system by pressingthe TCS On/Off switch. The TCSActivation indicator comes on as areminder. Pressing the switch againturns the system back on.


Driving

TCS ON/OFF Switch TCS Activation Indicator

192

０３／０９／０３　１１：５６：４０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１９５　



If the TCS indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe and turn off theengine. Reset the system by re-starting the engine, and watch theTCS indicator. If the indicatorremains on, or comes back on whiledriving, have the TCS inspected byyour Honda dealer. You can stilldrive the vehicle without TCS.

The TCS indicator may occasionallycome on for one or two seconds andthen go out. This is normal.

This indicator will come on alongwith the ABS indicator if there is aproblem in the anti-lock brakesystem (see on page

).

If the TCS indicator comes on alongwith the Brake System indicator, itindicates a problem in the brakesystem (see

on page ).62

189


Driving

ABS Indicator

Brake SystemIndicator

193

０３／０９／０３　１１：５６：４７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１９６　



To safely tow a trailer, you shouldobserve the load limits, use theproper equipment, and follow theguidelines in this section.

The totalweight of the trailer andeverything loaded in it must notexceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towinga load that is too heavy canseriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway. Too muchtongue load reduces front-tiretraction and steering control.

Driving

Towing a Trailer

Load Limits

Total Trailer Weight: Tongue Load:

194

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

０３／０９／０３　１１：５６：５６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１９７　



To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

Always use safety chains. Make surethey are secured to both the trailerand hitch, and that they cross underthe tongue so they can catch thetrailer if it becomes unhitched.Leave enough slack to allow thetrailer to turn corners easily, but donot let chains drag on the ground.

The total weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, all cargo, and thetongue load must not exceed:

(DX, LX)

(DX, LX)

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

on the front axle

on the rear axle

(EX, EX-L)

(EX, EX-L)4-cylinder models:

6-cylinder models:

4-cylinder models:

6-cylinder models:

Driving

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Checking LoadsGross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Safety Chains

Towing a Trailer

195

4,080 Ibs (1,850 kg)

4,125 Ibs (1,870 kg)

4,300 Ibs (1,950 kg)

2,195 Ibs (995 kg)

1,960 Ibs (890 kg)

2,225 Ibs (1,010 kg)

1,985 Ibs (900 kg)

2,360 Ibs (1,070 kg)

2,005 Ibs (910 kg)

０３／０９／０３　１１：５７：１０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１９８　



Towing can require a variety ofequipment, depending on the size ofyour trailer, how it will be used, andhow much load you are towing.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and that it meetsfederal, state, province, and localregulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Honda recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electrically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

See your trailer dealer for moreinformation on installing electricbrakes.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, and localregulations. Check with your localrecreational vehicle dealer for therequirements in your area, and use

only equipment designed for yourvehicle.

Driving

Towing Equipment andAccessories

Hitches

Trailer Brakes

Additional Trailer Equipment

Trailer Lights

Towing a Trailer

196

０３／０９／０３　１１：５７：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０１９９　



When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, and cooling systemare in good operating condition.

All weights and loads are withinlimits (see pages and ).

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All items on and in the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The lights and brakes on yourvehicle and the trailer are workingproperly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated (see page ),and the trailer tires and spare aretrailer maker.

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailerswaying. When being passed by alarge vehicle, keep a constant speedand steer straight ahead. Do not tryto make quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; then turn the wheel to the leftto get the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park (automatic) orin 1st or Reverse (manual). Also,place wheel chocks at each of thetrailer’s tires.

194 195

238

bottom

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Pre-Tow Checklist

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Backing Up

Parking

197

０３／０９／０３　１１：５７：３７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２００　



The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (Hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed and shift down to 2ndgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.If you have an automatictransmission, use D position whentowing a trailer on level roads. D isthe proper shift lever position to usewhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain.(See ‘‘ ’’ in the nextcolumn for additional gearinformation.)

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

33

Towing a Trailer

Driving

Driving Safely With a Trailer Making Turns and Braking

Driving on Hills

Driving on Hills

Towing Speeds and Gears

198

０３／０９／０３　１１：５７：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２０１　



This section also includesMaintenance Schedules for normaldriving and severe driving conditions,a Maintenance Record, and instruc-tions for simple maintenance tasksyou may want to take care ofyourself.

If you have the skills and tools to per-form more complex maintenancetasks on your Honda, you may wantto purchase the Service Manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your Hondadealer.

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

......................Maintenance Safety . 200.................Maintenance Schedule . 201

............Servicing Your Vehicle . 202Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 203.....................4-cylinder Models . 204.....................6-cylinder Models . 206....................Maintenance Record . 208

..............................Fluid Locations . 212........................Adding Engine Oil . 214

.......Recommended Engine Oil . 214..............................Synthetic Oil . 215

................Engine Oil Additives . 215.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 216

....................Windshield Washers . 218..............................Engine Coolant . 219

............Adding Engine Coolant . 219.......................Transmission Fluid . 221

Automatic.........................Transmission . 221

5-speed Manual.........................Transmission . 224

................Brake and Clutch Fluid . 225................................Brake Fluid . 225...............................Clutch Fluid . 226

....................Power Steering Fluid . 226

....................................Timing Belt . 227

....................................Hood Latch . 227.............................................Lights . 228

........................Replacing Bulbs . 228.........................................Seat Belt . 235

.....................................Floor Mats . 235..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 235

.................................Wiper Blades . 236...............................................Tires . 238

......................................Inflation . 238..........................Tire Inspection . 240

.....................Tire Maintenance . 240.............................Tire Rotation . 241

.........................Replacing Tires . 241......................Wheels and Tires . 242

..........................Winter Driving . 242.............................Snow Tires . 242............................Tire Chains . 243

................Checking Your Battery . 244.............................Vehicle Storage . 246

291

Maintenance

Maintenance 199

０３／０９／０３　１１：５７：５７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２０２　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by aHonda technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.Wear eye protection andprotective clothing whenworking near the battery orwhen using compressed air.

Be surethere is adequate ventilationwhenever you operate theengine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

Maintenance Safety

Maintenance


Carbon Monoxide poisonfrom engine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

Potential Vehicle Hazards

200

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspection,maintenance recommendations,and schedules in this owner’smanual.

０３／０９／０３　１１：５８：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２０３　



－

－

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions if you drive your vehicleMAINLY under one or more of thefollowing conditions.

Driving less than 5 miles (8 km)per trip or, in freezingtemperatures, driving less than 10miles (16 km) per trip.

Driving in extremely hot [over90°F (32°C)] conditions.

Used primarily as a deliveryvehicle or taxi that is drivenmostly in stop-and-go traffic and/or parked with the engine idling.

Trailer towing, driving with a rooftop carrier, or driving inmountainous conditions.

Driving on muddy, dusty, or de-iced roads.

If you onlydrive under a ‘‘severe’’ condition, youshould follow the Normal ConditionsMaintenance Schedule.

The maintenance schedule assumesyou will use your vehicle as normaltransportation for passengers andtheir possessions. You should alsofollow these recommendations:

Service your vehicle according to thetime and mileage periods on one ofthe Maintenance Schedules on thefollowing pages.

Follow theMaintenance Schedule for SevereConditions.

Avoid exceeding your vehicle’sload limit. This puts excess stresson the engine, brakes, and manyother vehicle parts. The load limitis shown on the tire informationlabel on the driver’s doorjamb.

Operate your vehicle onreasonable roads within the legalspeed limit.

Drive your vehicle regularly over adistance of several miles(kilometers).

Always use unleaded gasoline withthe proper octane rating (see page

).164

OCCASIONALLY

Maintenance Schedule

Maintenance

Which Schedule to Follow

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

201

NOTE:

０３／０９／０３　１１：５８：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２０４　



＃

Your authorized Honda dealerknows your vehicle best and canprovide competent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orskilled person to keep yourwarranties in effect. Keep all thereceipts as proof of completion, andhave the person who does the workfill out the Maintenance Record.Check your warranty booklet formore information.

We recommend the use of Hondaparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done.

Maintenance,replacement, or repair of emissionscontrol devices and systems may bedone by any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPAstandards.

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Hondarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed at therecommended time or mileageperiod to ensure long-term reliability.


Maintenance

Servicing Your Vehicle

U.S. Vehicles:

202

０３／０９／０３　１１：５８：３１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２０５　



－

－

－

－

－

－

－

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See pages

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.

168

169

221 224

225

238


Maintenance

Owner’s Maintenance Checks

203

０３／０９／０３　１１：５８：４０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２０６　



＃＊

＃

＃

＊

4-cylinder Models

Maintenance204

miles x 1,000km x 1,000

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).

Check oil and coolant at each fuel stopCheck inflation and condition once a month

Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes firstEvery 10,000 miles (16,000 km)

Every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or every 2 years, whichever comes first

Inspect every 110,000 miles (176,000 km), otherwise adjust only if noisy

Every 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or every 6 years, whichever comes firstEvery 160,000 miles (256,000 km)

120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 yearsEvery 3 years (independent of mileage)

Every 20,000 miles (32,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes first

1016

2032

3048

5080

6096

70112

80128

90144

100160

110176

120192

130208

140224

150240

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.

4064

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oilRotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 )Replace engine oil filterCheck front and rear brake wearCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Inspect drive beltReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace automatic transmission fluidReplace manual transmission fluidInspect idle speedReplace engine coolantReplace brake fluid

::

202Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

０３／０９／０３　１１：５９：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２０７　



＃＊＊

＃

＃

＊

＊

Maintenance

4-cylinder Models

205

miles x 1,000km x 1,000



Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km)

Every 3 years (independent of mileage)120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 5 years

Every 160,000 miles (256,000 km)Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or every 3 years, whichever comes first


Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)




Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first

Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .

1016

2032

3048

4064

5080

70112

80128

90144

100160

110176

120192

130208

140224

150240

6096

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oilRotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 )Replace engine oil filterCheck front and rear brake wearLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustmentInspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connectionsLights and controls/vehicle underbody

Inspect drive beltReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace automatic transmission fluidReplace manual transmission fluidInspect idle speedReplace engine coolantReplace brake fluid

:1:2:

202235

1

2

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

０３／０９／０３　１１：５９：２８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２０８　



＃＊

＃

＃

＊

Maintenance

6-cylinder Models

206


See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .Replace at 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every 90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years.

miles x 1,000km x 1,000




Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 1 year, whichever comes firstEvery 7,500 miles (12,000 km)



Inspect every 165,000 miles (264,000 km)Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes first

4572

3048

6096

75120

90144

105168

120192

135216

150240

1524

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oilRotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 )Replace engine oil filterCheck front and rear brake wearCheck parking brake adjustmentInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

Inspect drive beltReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace automatic transmission fluidInspect idle speedReplace timing belt and inspect water pumpReplace engine coolantReplace brake fluid

::

202Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Norm

alC

onditi

ons

０３／０９／０３　１１：５９：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２０９　



＃＊＊＊

＃

＃

＊

＊

＃＊

Maintenance

6-cylinder Models

207

Service the items listed at the indicated distance (or time, if given).miles x 1,000km x 1,000


Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes firstEvery 7,500 miles (12,000 km)

1524

3048

4572

75120

150240

135216



Every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) (Use normal schedule except in dusty conditions)

105168

6096

90144

120192


Inspect every 165,000 miles (264,000 km)Every 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or every 7 years, whichever comes first


See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page .See dust and pollen filter on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.Replace at 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years.See timing belt on page for replacement information under special driving conditions.

Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or every 6 months, whichever comes first

Check engine oil and coolantCheck tiresReplace engine oil and oil filterRotate tires (follow pattern on page 241 )Check front and rear brake wearInspect the following items:

Tie-rod ends, steering gearbox, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft boots

Check parking brake adjustmentLubricate all hinges, locks and latchesInspect the following items:

Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connectionsLights and controls/vehicle underbody

Inspect drive beltReplace dust and pollen filterReplace air cleaner elementReplace spark plugsInspect valve clearanceReplace automatic transmission fluidInspect idle speedReplace timing belt , and inspect water pumpReplace engine coolantReplace brake fluid

:1:2:3: 223

202235

1

2

3

Main

tenance

Sch

edule

for

Seve

reC

onditio

ns

０３／０９／０３　１２：００：１３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２１０　



(for Normal and Severe Schedules)Maintenance Record

Maintenance208

3,750 mi

5,000 mi

7,500 mi

10,000 mi

11,250 mi

15,000 mi

18,750 mi

20,000 mi

22,250 mi

25,000 mi

26,250 mi

30,000 mi

33,750 mi

35,000 mi

37,500 mi

40,000 mi

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (pages , ) orsevere conditions (pages , ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your vehicle.

6,000 km

8,000 km

12,000 km

16,000 km

18,000 km

24,000 km

30,000 km

32,000 km

Signature or dealer stamp mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

36,000 km

40,000 km

42,000 km

48,000 km

54,000 km

56,000 km

60,000 km

64,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

207205204 206

０３／０９／０３　１２：００：２２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２１１　



(for Normal and Severe Schedules)

CONTINUED

Maintenance Record

Maintenance 209

41,250 mi

45,000 mi

48,750 mi

50,000 mi

52,500 mi

55,000 mi

56,250 mi

60,000 mi

63,750 mi

65,000 mi

67,500 mi

70,000 mi

71,250 mi

75,000 mi

78,750 mi

80,000 mi

66,000 km

72,000 km

78,000 km

80,000 km

84,000 km

88,000 km

90,000 km

96,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

102,000 km

104,000 km

108,000 km

112,000 km

114,000 km

120,000 km

126,000 km

128,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

０３／０９／０３　１２：００：３０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２１２　




Maintenance210

82,500 mi

85,000 mi

86,250 mi

90,000 mi

93,750 mi

95,000 mi

97,500 mi

100,000 mi

101,250 mi

105,000 mi

108,750 mi

110,000 mi

112,500 mi

115,000 mi

116,250 mi

120,000 mi

132,000 km

136,000 km

138,000 km

144,000 km

150,000 km

152,000 km

156,000 km

166,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

162,000 km

168,000 km

174,000 km

176,000 km

180,000 km

184,000 km

186,000 km

192,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

０３／０９／０３　１２：００：３８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２１３　




Maintenance 211

123,750 mi

125,000 mi

127,500 mi

130,000 mi

131,250 mi

135,000 mi

138,750 mi

140,000 mi

142,500 mi

145,000 mi

146,250 mi

150,000 mi

198,000 km

200,000 km

204,000 km

208,000 km

210,000 km

216,000 km

222,000 km

224,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

228,000 km

232,000 km

234,000 km

240,000 km


Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

mi/km

Date

０３／０９／０３　１２：００：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２１４　



Fluid Locations

4-cylinder Models

Maintenance212

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange handle)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

RADIATOR CAP

CLUTCH FLUID(5-speed ManualTransmission only)(Light gray cap)

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

０３／０９／０３　１２：００：５１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２１５　



Fluid Locations

6-cylinder Models

Maintenance 213

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

BRAKE FLUID(Gray cap)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

COOLANTRESERVOIR

RADIATOR CAP

POWER STEERINGFLUID (Red cap)

WASHER FLUID(Blue cap)

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

０３／０９／０３　１２：００：５８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２１６　



Oil is a major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-grade 5W-20detergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving, and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill. Clean up any spillsimmediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Install the engine oil fill cap andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes and recheck the oil level. Donot fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

Recommended Engine Oil

214

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

6-cylinder models4-cylinder models

０３／０９／０３　１２：０１：０６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２１７　



Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines’’.

The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your Honda toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Sealand it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals given on the maintenanceschedule.

Your Honda does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect your engine’s or transmission’sperformance and durability.

Adding Engine Oil

Maintenance

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

215

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

Ambient Temperature

０３／０９／０３　１２：０１：１６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２１８　



Remove the oil filter and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourHonda dealer) is required.

Open the hood and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the recommendations inthe maintenance schedule. The oiland filter collect contaminants thatcan damage your engine if they arenot removed regularly.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

3.2.

1.

Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance216

WASHER

4-cylinder models

WASHER

6-cylinder models

OIL DRAIN BOLT OIL DRAIN BOLT

０３／０９／０３　１２：０１：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２１９　



Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

Refill the engine with the recom-mended oil.

Engine oil change capacity(including filter):(4-cylinder models)

(6-cylinder models)

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine, let it sit forseveral minutes, then check the oillevel on the dipstick. If necessary,add more oil.

(6-cylinder models)

(4-cylinder models)

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten it to:

Make sure to clean off any dirtand dust on the connectingsurface of a new oil filter.

9.

8.

7.

6.4.

5.

Changing the Oil and Filter

Maintenance 217

OIL FILTER

6-cylinder models

OIL FILTER

4-cylinder models

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

33 lbf·ft (45 N·m , 4.6 kgf·m)

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０１：４１　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２２０　



Check the level in the windshieldwasher reservoir at least monthlyduring normal use.

When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition the blade edges.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.

The low washerlevel indicator will light when thelevel is low (see page ).

Check the reservoir’s fluid level byremoving the cap and looking at thelevel gauge attached to the cap.

67

Canadian Models:

Windshield Washers

Maintenance218

NOTICE:

LEVEL GAUGE


LEVEL GAUGE

Do not use engine antif reezeor a vinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０１：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２２１　



If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.Always use Honda All SeasonAntifreeze/Coolant Type 2. Thiscoolant is pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

Maintenance 219

6-cylinder models RESERVE TANKRESERVE TANK4-cylinder models

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０２：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２２２　



When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

Pour the coolant slowly andcarefully so you do not spill. Cleanup any spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Put the radiator cap back on andtighten it.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

4.

5.

1.

2.

3.

Engine Coolant

Maintenance220

6-cylinder models RADIATOR CAP

RADIATOR CAP

4-cylinder models

０３／０９／０３　１２：０２：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２２３　



4-cylinder models

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lower

marks.

Make sure the rubber cap on thedipstick fits in the dipstick guideand that you push the dipstick inall the way.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.

1.

2.

3.

5.

4.

CONTINUED

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance


221

DIPSTICK

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

０３／０９／０３　１２：０２：２５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２２４　



To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid accordingto the time and distance recommen-dations in the maintenance schedule.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Honda dealer.

1.

2.

6.6-cylinder models

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance


222

DIPSTICK

０３／０９／０３　１２：０２：３６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２２５　



Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the tube tobring it to the upper mark.

To thoroughly flush the transmission,the technician should drain and refillit with Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid), then drive thevehicle for a short distance. Do thisthree times. Then drain and refill thetransmission a final time.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(Automatic Transmission Fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality. Havethe transmission flushed and refilledwith Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it isconvenient.

Make sure the rubber cap fits inthe dipstick guide and the dipstickis down all the way.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

5.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance 223

UPPER MARK

LOWER MARK

０３／０９／０３　１２：０２：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２２６　



Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission.


If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your Honda dealer.

Check the fluid level with thetransmission at normal operatingtemperature and the vehicle sittingon level ground. Remove thetransmission filler bolt, and carefullyfeel inside the bolt hole with yourfinger. The fluid level should be upto the edge of the bolt hole. If it isnot, add Honda ManualTransmission Fluid (MTF) until itstarts to run out of the hole. Reinstallthe filler bolt, and tighten it securely.

If Honda MTF is not available, youmay use an SAE 10W-30 or 10W-40viscosity motor oil with the APICertification seal that says ‘‘FORGASOLINE ENGINES’’ as atemporary replacement. However,motor oil does not contain the properadditives, and continued use cancause stiffer shifting. Replace assoon as it is convenient.


6.

Transmission Fluid

Maintenance


224

FILLER BOLT

Correct level

０３／０９／０３　１２：０２：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２２７　



Check the fluid level in thereservoirs monthly. There are up totwo reservoirs, depending on themodel. They are:

Brake fluid reservoir (all models)Clutch fluid reservoir(manual transmission only)

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

Replace the brake fluid according tothe recommendations in themaintenance schedule.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Brake and Clutch Fluid

Maintenance

Brake Fluid

225

MAX

MIN

０３／０９／０３　１２：０３：０５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２２８　



The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If it is not, addbrake fluid to bring it up to that level.Use the same fluid specified for thebrake system.

Low fluid level can indicate a leak inthe clutch system. Have this systeminspected as soon as possible.

Check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL.

Brake and Clutch Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

Maintenance

Clutch Fluid Power Steering Fluid

226

MAX

MIN

UPPER LEVEL

4-cylinder models LOWER LEVEL LOWER LEVEL

UPPER LEVEL

6-cylinder models

０３／０９／０３　１２：０３：１６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２２９　



－－

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown in themaintenance schedule.

Replace these belts at 60,000 miles(U.S.) or 100,000 km (Canada) if youregularly drive your vehicle in one ormore of these conditions:

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C). Clean the hood latch assembly with a

mild cleaner, then lubricate it with amultipurpose grease. Lubricate allthe moving parts (as shown),including the pivot. Follow the timeand distance recommendations inthe Maintenance Schedule. If youare not sure how to clean and greasethe latch, contact your Honda dealer.

6-cylinder models only

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

Maintenance

Timing Belt Hood Latch

227

LATCH ASSEMBLY

PIVOTS

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０３：２６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２３０　



The headlights were properly aimedwhen your vehicle was new. If youregularly carry heavy items in thetrunk or pull a trailer, readjustmentmay be required. Adjustmentsshould be performed by a Hondatechnician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Your vehicle has two bulbs on eachside, four in total. Make sure you arereplacing the bulb that is burned out.Your vehicle uses halogen headlightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Lights

Maintenance

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb

228

NOTE: Halogen headlight bulbs getvery hot when lit. Oil, perspiration, or ascratch on the glass can cause the bulbto overheat and shatter.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０３：３４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２３１　



CONTINUED

Open the hood. To change a bulbon the passenger’s side, undo thetwo fasteners and remove the airintake cover.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Install the new bulb and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

1. 3.2.

4.

Lights

Maintenance

High Beam Headlight

229

FASTENERS

4-cylinder models 6-cylinder models TAB

BULBAIR INTAKECOVER

AIR INTAKECOVER

FASTENERS

4-cylinder models

０３／０９／０３　１２：０３：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２３２　



Push the electrical connector ontothe bulb.

To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Remove the bulb by turning itapproximately one-quarter turncounterclockwise.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by squeezing theconnector to unlock the tab, thenslide the connector off the bulb.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

(Passenger’s side)Reinstall the air intake cover.Reinstall the two fasteners andsecure them by pushing on theheads until they lock.

6.

5. 3.

4.

5.

1.

2.7.

Lights

Maintenance

Low Beam Headlight

230

HOLDING CLIPS

TAB

BULB

6-cylinder models BULB

０３／０９／０３　１２：０３：５９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２３３　



Install the new bulb and turn itone-quarter turn clockwise to lockit in place.

Push the electrical connector ontothe bulb.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install the two holding clips. Lockeach one in place by pushing onthe center.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the two holding clips fromthe inner fender.

To change the passenger’s sidebulb, start the engine, turn thesteering wheel all the way to theleft, and turn off the engine. Tochange the driver’s side bulb, turnthe steering wheel to the right.

Pull the inner fender cover awayfrom the fender and bumper.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

1. 3.

2.

4.

8.

7.

6.

9.

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing the Front Side Marker/Turn Signal and Parking LightBulb

231

HOLDING CLIPS

BULB

０３／０９／０３　１２：０４：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２３４　



To remove the burned out bulb,push it in and turn itcounterclockwise until it unlocks.

Install the new bulb and turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Insert the socket into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Put the inner fender cover in place.Install and lock each holding clipby pushing on the center.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Maintenance232

０３／０９／０３　１２：０４：２０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２３５　



Open the trunk.

Remove the light assembly coverby pulling its outside edge.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwiseand pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Push a new bulb straight into thesocket until it bottoms, andreinstall the socket into the lightassembly by turning it clockwiseuntil it locks.

Open the trunk.

Remove the trim clips from theright or left corner of the trunk lidtrim by carefully prying themusing a small, flat-tip screwdriverwrapped with tape.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Reinstall the light assembly cover.

1.

3.

2.

4.

5.

1.

2.

6.

6-cylinder models

CONTINUED

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Fenders)

Replacing Rear Bulbs(in Trunk Lid)

233

BULBS

COVER

SOCKETS

TRIM CLIPS

０３／０９／０３　１２：０４：３４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２３６　



Carefully bend back the corner ofthe trunk lid trim to expose thebulbs.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwiseand pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Install a new bulb into the socketand reinstall the socket into thelight assembly.

Open the trunk and remove thesocket from the light assembly byturning it one-quarter turn counter-clockwise.

Remove the burned-out bulb bypulling it straight out of the socket.

Install the new bulb and reinstallthe socket.Press the trim clips back into their

holes.

Push the trunk lid trim back intoposition.

Test the lights.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

1.

2.

3.8.

Lights

Maintenance

Replacing a High-mount BrakeLight Bulb

234

BULBS

SOCKETS

BULBS

SOCKETS

BULB

SOCKET

０３／０９／０３　１２：０４：４７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２３７　



Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If you use a non-Honda floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchor. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mat.

This filter removes the dust andpollen that is brought in from theoutside through the heating andcooling system/climate controlsystem.

Have your Honda dealer replace thisfilter every 30,000 miles (48,000 km)under normal conditions. It shouldbe replaced every 15,000 miles(24,000 km) if you drive primarily inurban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air, or ifthe flow from the climate controlsystem becomes less than usual.

Clean dirty seat belts with a softbrush and a mixture of mild soap andwarm water. Do not use bleach, dye,or cleaning solvents that can weakenthe belt material. Let the belts airdry before you use the vehicle.

If you remove the floor mats, makesure to re-anchor them when you putthem back in your vehicle.

The driver’s and right rear floormats that came with your vehiclehooks over the floor mat anchor.This keeps the floor mats fromsliding forward and possiblyinterfering with the pedals ormarking the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.

Seat Belts, Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter

Maintenance

Seat Belts Floor Mats

Dust and Pollen Filter

235

LOOP

０３／０９／０３　１２：０５：００　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２３８　



Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every six months.Look for signs of cracking in therubber, or areas that are gettinghard. Replace the blades if you findthese signs, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

To replace a wiper blade:

Raise the wiper arm off thewindshield. Raise the driver’s sidefirst, then the passenger’s side.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by pushing inthe lock tab. Hold the lock tab inwhile you push the blade assemblytoward the base of the arm.

2.

1.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance236

WIPER ARMS

LOCK TAB

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damage thehood and wiper arms.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０５：０９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２３９　



Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Slide the wiper blade assemblyonto the wiper arm. Make sure itlocks in place.

Lower the wiper arm down againstthe windshield. Lower thepassenger’s side first, then thedriver’s side.

3. 4.

5.

6.

7.

Wiper Blades

Maintenance 237

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

０３／０９／０３　１２：０５：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２４０　



Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold air pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional technical information,see page .

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure at least once a month. Eventires that are in good condition maylose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.Remember to check the spare tire atthe same time.

276

Tires

Maintenance

Inflation

238

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０５：３０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２４１　



＊＊

＊

＊

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least threehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km).

Add or release air, if needed, tomatch the recommended cold tirepressures on this page.

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot (driven for severalmiles), you will see readings 4 to 6psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 kgf/cm )higher than the cold reading. This isnormal; do not release air to matchthe cold pressure.

Tubeless tires have some ability toself-seal if they are punctured. Youshould look closely for punctures if atire starts losing pressure.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

The compact spare tire pressure is:

All models except LX

LX model

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

Tire Size Cold Tire Pressurefor Normal Driving

12

Front:

Rear:

EX and V6 modelsDX model

Front:

Rear:

1

2

Tires

Maintenance 239

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

P195/65R15 89HP205/60R16 91V 32 psi (220 kPa ,

2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

P205/65R15 92H30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa ,2.0 kgf/cm )

０３／０９／０３　１２：０５：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２４２　



Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

Your vehicle’s tires have wearindicators molded into the tread.When the tread wears down to thatpoint, you will see a 1/2 inch (12.7mm) wide band running across thetread. This shows there is less than1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread left onthe tire. A tire that is this worn givesvery little traction on wet roads. Youshould replace the tire if you can seethe tread wear indicator in three ormore places around the tire.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Excessive tread wear.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either or these conditions.

U.S. LX, EX and EX-V6 models

Tires

Maintenance

Tire Inspection Tire Maintenance

240

NOTICE: Improper wheel weights candamage your vehicle’s aluminumwheels. Use only genuine Hondawheels weights f or balancing.

０３／０９／０３　１５：４２：３９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２４３　



To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires every 10,000 miles (16,000km). Move the tires to the positionsshown in the chart each time theyare rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall). Mixing radial andbias-ply tires on your vehicle canreduce braking ability, traction, andsteering accuracy. Using tires of adifferent size or construction cancause the ABS to work inconsistently.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

If you ever replace a wheel, makesure that the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheels.

The ABS works by comparing thespeed of the wheels. When replacingtires, use the same size originallysupplied with the vehicle. Tire sizeand construction can affect wheelspeed and may cause the system towork.

Maintenance

Tire Rotation Replacing Tires

Tires

241

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Front Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０６：１６　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２４４　



＋Wheel:

Tire:

Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

If you mount snow tires on yourHonda, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size explanation.

DX and LX models

All EX models

LX-V6 model

DX model

LX model

All EX and V6 models

277

279

Maintenance

Wheels and Tires Winter Driving Snow Tires

Tires

242

P195/65R15 89H

P205/65R15 92H

P205/60R16 91V

15 x 6 1/2 JJ

16 x 6 1/2 JJ (Aluminum wheelsonly)

16 x 6 1/2 JJ (Steel wheels only)

０３／０９／０３　１２：０６：３０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２４５　



When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1134Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

Link-type: SCC Quick Grip QG1130Cable-types: SCC Radial ChainCH2311T or SCC SC Cable SC1030

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Honda stronglyrecommends using the chains listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

Mount snow chains on your tireswhen required by driving conditionsor local laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

EX and V6

LX

DX

Tires

Maintenance

Tire Chains

243

NOTICE:

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are thewrong size or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０６：４０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２４６　



－Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your Honda dealer or aqualified technician.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

Checking the Battery

Maintenance

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

244

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

4-cylinder models

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

6-cylinder models

０３／０９／０３　１２：０６：４９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２４７　



Checking the Battery

Maintenance 245

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０６：５３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２４８　



Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Reverse(5-speed manual) or Park(automatic).

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than onemonth), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, such

as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

If you store your vehicle for 1 year orlonger, have your Honda dealerperform the inspections as soon asyou take it out of storage (see pages

and ). The 6-cylinder modelneeds the inspections called for inthe 2 years/30,000 miles (48,000 km)maintenance schedule (NormalConditions) and the 4-cylinder modelneeds the inspections called for inthe 2 years/40,000 miles (64,000 km)maintenance schedule (NormalConditions). The replacementscalled for in the maintenanceschedule are not needed unless thevehicle has actually reached thattime or mileage.

200 202

Vehicle Storage

Maintenance246

０３／０９／０３　１２：０７：０７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２４９　



This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

......................Compact Spare Tire . 248....................Changing a Flat Tire . 249

..........If Your Engine Won’t Start . 253Nothing Happens or theStarter Motor Operates

............................Very Slowly . 253The Starter Operates

................................Normally . 254

................................Jump Starting . 255............If Your Engine Overheats . 257

.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 259..........Charging System Indicator . 260

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 260.......................Readiness Codes . 261

...............Brake System Indicator . 262..................Closing the Moonroof . 263

......................Emergency Towing . 264..............................................Fuses . 265

..........Checking and Replacing . 265

Taking Care of the Unexpected


247

０３／０９／０３　１２：０７：１２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２５０　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use the compact spare tireif you are towing a trailer.

Turn off the Traction ControlSystem (see page ). Drivingwith the compact spare tire mayactivate the TCS.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replacedand put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

191

On all LX-V6 and EX-V6 models

Compact Spare Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected248

INDICATOR LOCATION MARK

TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

０３／０９／０３　１２：０７：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２５１　



CONTINUED

Park the vehicle on firm, level andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park (automatic)or Reverse (manual). Apply theparking brake.

The tools are in the trunk. Openthe trunk and raise the trunk floorby lifting up on the back edge.

Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch toLOCK (0). Have all thepassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Take the tool kit out of the trunk.

Unscrew the wing bolt and takethe spare tire out of its well.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area that isfar away from the traffic lanes.

5.

4.

3.

2.

1.

Changing a Flat Tire

Taking Care of the Unexpected 249

TRUNK FLOOR

SPARE TIRE JACKTOOL KIT

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０７：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２５２　



The jack is behind a cover in theright fender. Remove the cover byturning the handle counterclock-wise, then pulling on the cover.

Turn the jack’s end bracketcounterclockwise to loosen it, thenremove the jack.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

6. 7.

8.

9.



JACK JACKING POINT

０３／０９／０３　１２：０７：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２５３　



CONTINUED

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Remove the wheel nuts and flattire. Place the flat tire on theground with the outside surface ofthe wheel facing up.

Use the extension and wheelwrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Do not attempt to forcibly pry thewheel cover off with a screwdriveror other tool. The wheel covercannot be removed without firstremoving the wheel nuts.

10. 12.

11.

U.S. DX, LX and LX-G model inCanada:



WHEEL WRENCH

EXTENSION

BRAKE HUB

０３／０９／０３　１２：０７：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２５４　



Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Remove the center cap beforestoring the flat tire in the trunkwell.

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Remove the spacer cone from thewing bolt, turn it over, and put itback on the bolt.

Secure the flat tire by screwingthe wing bolt back into its hole.

Store the jack in its holder. Turnthe jack’s end bracket to lock it inplace. Replace the cover. Store thetools.

Lower the vehicle to the groundand remove the jack.

15.13.

14.

16.

19.

17.

18.

20.

LX, EX, and EX-V6 models



252

WING BOLT

SPACER CONE

Fornormaltire

Forsparetire

80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)

０３／０９／０３　１２：０８：０７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２５５　



Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn thekey to START (III):

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch toSTART (III), you do not hear thenormal noise of the engine trying tostart. You may hear a clicking soundor series of clicks, or nothing at all.

Check the transmission interlock.If you have a manual transmission,the clutch pedal must be pushedall the way to the floor or thestarter will not operate. With anautomatic transmission, it must bein Park or Neutral.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).Turn on the headlights, and checktheir brightness. If the headlightsare very dim or don’t light at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Store the wheel cover or centercap in the trunk. Make sure it doesnot get scratched or damaged.

Check these things:

21.

255

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat Tire, If the Engine Won’t Start


If the Engine Won’t Start Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Jump Starting

253

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０８：２０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２５６　



Turn the ignition switch to START(III). If the headlights do not dim,check the condition of the fuses. Ifthe fuses are OK, there isprobably something wrong withthe electrical circuit for theignition switch or starter motor.You will need a qualifiedtechnician to determine theproblem (seeon page ).

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to START (III), butthe engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

Are you using a properly codedkey? An improperly coded key willcause the immobilizer systemindicator in the instrument panelto blink rapidly (see page ).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery is dis-charged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery connections (see page

). You can then try jumpstarting the vehicle from a boosterbattery (see page ).

264

244

255

179

81

265

264

If the Engine Won’t Start


Emergency Towing

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

254

０３／０９／０３　１２：０８：３２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２５７　



＋

＋

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start a Honda with anautomatic transmission by pushingor pulling it.

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or like ice, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourbattery. Connect the other end tothe positive ( ) terminal on thebooster battery.

To jump start your vehicle:

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED

Jump Starting


NOTICE:

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

If a battery sits in extremecold, the electrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０８：４２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２５８　



－Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding strapas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

Start the vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle untileverything is disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

7.

6.

5.4.

Jump Starting



０３／０９／０３　１２：０８：５３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２５９　



CONTINUED

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Neutral orPark, and set the parking brake.Turn off all accessories, and turnon the hazard warning indicators.

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood, turnoff the engine. Wait until you seeno more signs of steam or spray,then open the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

264

If the Engine Overheats


EmergencyTowing

257

NOTICE:

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperaturegauge pointer at the red mark cancause serious damage to your engine.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０９：０５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２６０　



If you don’t find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank (see page

). Add coolant if the level isbelow the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or large heavy cloth,turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Start the engine and set thetemperature control dial tomaximum (climate control toFULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Addcoolant to the radiator up to thebase of the filler neck. If you donot have the proper coolantmixture available, you can addplain water. Remember to havethe cooling system drained andrefilled with the proper mixture assoon as you can.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

7.

6. 8.

9.

10.

11.

219

264

If the Engine Overheats


EmergencyTowing

258

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０９：１５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２６１　



Start the engine and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within ten seconds, turn offthe engine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

This light should never come onwhen the engine is running. If itstarts flashing or stays on, the oilpressure has dropped very low orlost pressure. Serious enginedamage is possible and you shouldtake immediate action.

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

168

214

264


Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

259

NOTICE:LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR

Running the engine with lowoil pressure can cause seriousmechanical damage almost immediately.Turn of f the engine as soon as you cansaf ely get the vehicle stopped.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０９：２４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２６２　



Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.Go to a service station or garagewhere you can get technicalassistance.

If the charging system indicatorcomes on brightly when the engineis running, the battery is not beingcharged.

If the indicator comes on whiledriving, it means one of the engine’semission control systems may have aproblem. Even though you may feelno difference in your vehicle’sperformance, continued operationmay cause serious damage.


Malfunction Indicator LampCharging System Indicator

Charging System Indicator, Malfunction Indicator Lamp

260

CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP

０３／０９／０３　１２：０９：３５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２６３　



If the indicator remains on or thefuel cap was not loose or missing,have the vehicle checked by thedealer as soon as possible.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It takes at leastthree days of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the cause of this indicatorcoming on could be a loose ormissing fuel fill cap. Check the capor replace it. Tightening the cap willnot make the indicator turn offimmediately; it takes at least threedays of normal driving.

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

To check if they are set, turn theignition to ON (II), without startingthe engine. The MalfunctionIndicator Lamp will come on for 20seconds. If it then goes off, thereadiness codes are set. If it blinks 5times, the readiness codes are notset. If possible, do not take yourvehicle for a state emissions testuntil the readiness codes are set.Refer to State Emissions Testing formore information (see page ).285


Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Readiness Codes

261

NOTICE: If you keep driving with theMalf unction Indicator Lamp on, youcan damage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties. This indicator may alsocome on with the ‘‘D’’ indicator.

０３／０９／０３　１２：０９：４３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２６４　



＊

＊

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

If the ABS indicator comes on withthis indicator, have the vehicleinspected by your Honda dealerimmediately.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low in the reservoir.Press lightly on the brake pedal tosee if it feels normal. If it does,check the brake fluid level the nexttime you stop at a service station(see page ). If the fluid level islow, take your vehicle to the dealerand have the brake system inspectedfor leaks or worn brake pads.

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

225

264


Brake System Indicator

EmergencyTowing

262

BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR

U.S. indicator shown

０３／０９／０３　１２：０９：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２６５　



If the electric motor will not closethe moonroof, do the following:

Try closing the moonroof. If thenew fuse blows immediately or themoonroof motor still does notoperate, you can close themoonroof manually.

Check the fuse for the moonroofmotor (see page ). If the fuseis blown, replace it with one of thesame or lower rating.

Get the moonroof wrench out ofthe tool kit in the trunk.

Use a screwdriver or coin toremove the round plug in thecenter of the headliner.

Insert the moonroof wrench intothe socket behind this plug. Turnthe wrench until the moonroof isfully closed.

Remove the wrench. Reinstall theround plug.

5.

6.

4.

3.

1.

2.

265


Closing the Moonroof


ROUND PLUG SOCKET

０３／０９／０３　１２：１０：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２６６　



If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service oran organization. Never tow yourvehicle with just a rope or chain. It isvery dangerous.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.If your Honda cannot be transportedby flat-bed, it should be towed bywheel-lift equipment with the frontwheels off the ground. If, due todamage, your vehicle must be towedwith the front wheels on the ground,do the following:

Release the parking brake.Shift the transmission to Neutral.

Release the parking brake.Start the engine.Shift to D, then to N.Turn off the engine.

If you decide to tow your vehiclewith all four wheels on the ground,make sure you use a properly-designed and attached tow bar.Prepare the vehicle for towing asdescribed above, and leave theignition switch in Accessory (I) sothe steering wheel does not lock.Make sure the radio and any itemsplugged into the accessory powersocket are turned off so they do notrun down the battery.

With the front wheels on the ground,it is best to tow the vehicle no fartherthan 50 miles (80 km), and keep thespeed below 35 mph (55 km/h).

Do not use the sling-type towingequipment. This type of towing isunacceptable as your vehicle’ssuspension and body can beseriously damaged.

5-speed Manual Transmission:

Automatic Transmission:

Emergency Towing


The best way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

264

NOTICE:

NOTICE:

NOTICE:

Improper towing preparationwill damage the transmission. Followthe above procedure exactly. If youcannot shif t the transmission or startthe engine (automatic transmission),your vehicle must be transported withthe f ront wheels of f the ground. The steering system can be

damaged if the steering wheel is locked.Leave the ignition switch in Accessory(I), and make sure the steering wheelturns f reely bef ore you begin towing.

Trying to lif t or tow yourvehicle by the bumpers will causeserious damage. The bumpers are notdesigned to support the vehicle’s weight.

０３／０９／０３　１２：１０：１８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２６７　



The interior fuse box is on thedriver’s lower left side. To removethe fuse box lid, pull it toward youand take it out of its hinges.

The under-hood fuse box is locatednear the back of the engine compart-ment on the driver’s side. To open it,push the tabs as shown.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

and , or the diagram on thefuse box lid, which fuse or fusescontrol that component. Check thosefuses first, but check all the fusesbefore deciding that a blown fuse isnot the cause. Replace any blownfuses and check if the device works.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK(0). Make sure the headlights andall other accessories are off.

Remove the cover from the fusebox.

1.

2.

268 269

CONTINUED

Fuses


Checking and Replacing Fuses

265

INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD

TAB

０３／０９／０３　１２：１０：２９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２６８　



Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking at the wire inside.Removing these fuses requires aPhillips-head screwdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse box bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller provided in the under-hoodfuse box.

Look for a burned wire inside thefuse. If it is burned, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

3. 4.

5.


Fuses

266

BLOWN BLOWN BLOWN

０３／０９／０３　１２：１０：３７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２６９　



CONTINUED

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem in your vehicle.Leave the blown fuse in thatcircuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits withthe fuse puller provided in the under-hood fuse box. Make sure you cando without that circuit temporarily(such as the accessory power socketor radio).

If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

6.

Fuses


NOTICE:

FUSE PULLER

Replacing a f use with onethat has a higher rating greatlyincreases the chances of damaging theelectrical system. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

０３／０９／０３　１２：１０：４５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２７０　



－

－

＊

＊

＊

＋

＊

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

No. Amps. Circuits Protected

: 6-cylinder models

12345

10 A(30A)10 A15 A10 A

Left Headlight Low(Rear Defroster Coil)Left Headlight HiSmall LightRight Headlight Hi

6789

10

10 A7.5 A15 A20 A

Right Headlight LowBack UpFI ECUCondenser fanNot Used

111112131415161717181819202122

23

20 A30 A7.5 A20 A40 A40 A15 A30 A30 A20 A40 A40 A

(40 A)40 A

100 A

50 A50 A

Cooling FanCooling FanMG. ClutchHorn, StopRear DefrosterBack Up, ACCHazardABS MotorTCS MotorABS F/STCSHeated SeatsCondenser FanHeater MotorBatteryNot Used

B IG1 MainPower Window Main


Fuses

268

UNDER-HOOD FUSE/RELAY BOX

０３／０９／０３　１２：１０：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２７１　



－

－

－

＊

＊

＊＊

No.

No.

Amps. Amps.

Amps.

Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected

No. Circuits Protected

1 : 6-cylinder models2 : On Canadian models

789

101112

131415161718192021222324252627282930313233

(15 A)15 A

(10 A)15 A10 A7.5 A

10 A20 A15 A7.5 A30 A

(20 A)(20 A)(20 A)(20 A)(20 A)15 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A20 A

(20 A)

7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A

Back-Up LightsDoor LockFront Accessory SocketsIG OPDSIG WiperNot Used

Driver’s Power Seat SlideHeated SeatDriver’s Power Seat Recline

IG ACGIG Fuel PumpIG WasherIG MeterIG SRSIGP (PGM-FI ECU)Left Rear Power WindowRight Rear Power WindowRight Front Power WindowDriver’s Power WindowMoonroofNot UsedIG HACNot UsedACCHAC OP

123456

Drive by WireIgnition CoilDay LightLaf HeaterRadioInterior Light

Passenger’s Power Seat Recline

Passenger’s Power Seat Slide

1

2

Fuses


INTERIOR FUSE BOX

０３／０９／０３　１２：１１：０７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２７２　



The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour Honda, and the locations of theidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 272................................Specifications . 274

DOT Tire Quality Grading.....................(U. S. Vehicles) . 277

Uniform Tire Quality..................................Grading . 277.................................Treadwear . 277

......................................Traction . 277.............................Temperature . 278

.................................Tire Labeling . 279

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 280......Driving in Foreign Countries . 281

.......................Emissions Controls . 282.....................The Clean Air Act . 282

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 282

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 282

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 282

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 283....................PGM-FI System . 283

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 283

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 283

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 283

....................Replacement Parts . 283..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 284

..............State Emissions Testing . 285

Technical Information

Technical Information 271

０３／０９／０３　１２：１１：１５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２７４　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


The Vehicle Identification Number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourHonda dealer uses to register yourvehicle for warranty purposes. It isalso necessary for licensing andinsuring your vehicle. The easiestplace to find the VIN is on a platefastened to the top of the dashboard.You can see it by looking throughthe windshield on the driver’s side. Itis also on the Certification label at-tached to the driver’s doorjamb, andis stamped on the engine com-partment bulkhead. The VIN is alsoprovided in bar code on theCertification label.

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

Identif ication Numbers

Technical Information272

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

０３／０９／０３　１２：１１：２２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２７５　



The Engine Number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the front.

The Transmission Number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication Numbers


4-cylinder Models 6-cylinder Models

273

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER ENGINE NUMBER

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER

MANUALTRANSMISSIONNUMBER

ENGINENUMBER

０３／０９／０３　１２：１１：２９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２７６　



－－－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications


Dimensions

Air Conditioning

Weights

Capacities

Capacities

1.35 US gal (5.1 )1.32 US gal (5.0 )

1.90 US gal (7.2 )

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

5.6 US qt (5.3 )

2.0 US qt (1.9 )2.2 US qt (2.1 )

2.6 US qt (2.5 )

0.16 US gal (0.6 )

1.77 US gal (6.7 )

1.88 US gal (7.1 )2.22 US gal (8.4 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )

3.0 US qt (2.8 )3.1 US qt (2.9 )6.9 US qt (6.5 )7.6 US qt (7.2 )

4.8 US qt (4.5 )

189.5 in (4,813 mm)71.7 in (1,820 mm)57.2 in (1,453 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a)25 27 oz (700 750 g)16 18 oz (450 500 g)

ND-OIL8

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

107.9 in (2,740 mm)61.1 in (1,553 mm)61.2 in (1,554 mm)

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengine.Reserve tank capacity:Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Refrigerant typeCharge quantity

Lubricant type

Gross vehicle weight rating

Fuel tank

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

Enginecoolant

Engine oil

Manual trans-mission oilAutomatictransmissionfluid

Windshieldwasherreservoir

Approx.

FrontRear

1 : 6-cylinder models

2 :

3 :

ChangeManualAutomatic

TotalManualAutomatic

ChangeIncludingfilterWithoutfilter

Total

ChangeTotalChange

Total

U.S. VehiclesCanada Vehicles

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

3

０３／０９／０３　１２：１１：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２７７　



－

－－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－

＊＊

＊＊＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

＊＊

CONTINUED

Specifications


Lights

Fuses

Battery

Engine

Alignment

3.43 x 3.9 in (87.0 x 99.0 mm)

143.6 cu-in (2,354 cm )

12 V 60 W (HB3)12 V 51 W (HB4)12 V 24/2.2 CP

9.7 : 1

3.39 x 3.39 in (86.0 x 86.0 mm)

182.8 cu-in (2,997 cm )

10 : 1

12 V12 V12 V

12 V12 V

12 V12 V

21 W21/5 W2 CP21 W21 W3 CP8 W

52 AH/5 HR38 AH/5 HR12 V

12 V

12 V12 V12 V

1.1 W2 CP5 W

8 W8 W12 V

12 V

Headlights

Front turn signal/Front parking lightsRear turn signal lightsStop/TaillightsTaillightsHigh-mount brake lightBack-up lightsLicense plate lightCeiling lightSpotlightsSpotlights/Front ceiling lightsTrunk lightDoor courtesy lightVanity mirror lights

Interior

Under-hood

Capacity

Type

Bore x Stroke

Displacement

Compression ratio

Spark plugs

Water cooled 4-stroke, DOHCi-VTEC 4-cylinder, SOHC VTEC6-cylinder (V6), gasoline engine

Toe-in

Camber

Caster 3°15’1°

0°0.08 in (2.0 mm)0.00 in (0.0 mm)

IZFR6K-13SKJ20DR-M13

SKJ20DR-M11IZFR6K-11

See page 269 or the fuse labelattached to the inside of the fusebox door on each side of thedashboard.See page 268 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

HighLow

4-cylinder6-cylinder

1 : LX2 : EX

(Amber)

3 : 4-cylinder models4 : 6-cylinder models5 : On some models

NGK:DENSO:NGK:DENSO:

1

2

3

4

3

4

3

4

3, 4

3, 4

3, 5

3, 5

０３／０９／０３　１２：１２：１９　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２７８　



＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊

＊＊＊

Specifications


Tires

T135/90D15

P195/65R15 89H

P205/60R16 91VP205/65R15 92H

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

Size

Pressure

Front/Rear

SpareFront

Rear

Spare

1 : DX2 : LX3 : All EX and V6 models

1

2

3

1, 3

2

1, 3

2

０３／０９／０３　１２：１２：２７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２７９　



－

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

The tires on your car meet all U.S.Federal Safety Requirements. Alltires are also graded for treadwear,traction, and temperature perform-ance according to Department ofTransportation (DOT) standards.The following explains thesegradings.

All passenger vehicle tires mustconform to Federal SafetyRequirements in addition to thesegrades.


Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

277

０３／０９／０３　１２：１２：３８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２８０　



－ Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and not over-loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-tion, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, cancause heat buildup and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. Thegrade C corresponds to a level ofperformance, which all passengervehicle tires must meet under theFederal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratory testwheel than the minimum required bylaw.


Temperature A, B, C

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

278

０３／０９／０３　１２：１２：４４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２８１　



－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

Tire Identification Number (TIN) isa group of numbers and letters thatlook like the following example TIN.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow.

P

R

V

16

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

205

60

91


Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

Tire Labeling

279

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

P205/60R16 91V

０３／０９／０３　１２：１３：００　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２８２　



Some conventional gasolines arebeing blended with alcohol or anether compound. These gasolinesare collectively referred to asoxygenated fuels. To meet clean airstandards, some areas of the UnitedStates and Canada use oxygenatedfuels to help reduce emissions.

If you use an oxygenated fuel, besure it is unleaded and meets theminimum octane rating requirement.

Before using an oxygenated fuel, tryto confirm the fuel’s contents. Somestates/provinces require thisinformation to be posted on thepump.

The following are the U.S. EPA andCanadian CGSB approvedpercentages of oxygenates:

(ethyl or grain alcohol)You may use gasoline containing upto 10 percent ethanol by volume.Gasoline containing ethanol may bemarketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’

(Methyl Tertiary ButylEther)You may use gasoline containing upto 15 percent MTBE by volume.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

Fuel system damage or performanceproblems resulting from the use ofan oxygenated fuel containing morethan the percentages of oxygenatesgiven above are not covered underwarranty.

(methyl or woodalcohol)Your vehicle was not designed to usefuel that contains methanol.Methanol can corrode metal parts inthe fuel system, and also damageplastic and rubber components. Thisdamage would not be covered byyour warranties.

Oxygenated Fuels


ETHANOL

MTBE

METHANOL

280

０３／０９／０３　１２：１３：１０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２８３　



If you are planning to take yourHonda outside the U.S. or Canada,contact the tourist bureaus in theareas you will be traveling in to findout about the availability of unleadedgasoline with the proper octanerating.

If unleaded gasoline is not available,be aware that using leaded gasolinein your Honda will affect perfor-mance and fuel mileage, and damageits emissions controls. It will nolonger comply with U.S. andCanadian emissions regulations, andwill be illegal to operate in NorthAmerica. To bring your vehicle backinto compliance will require the re-placement of several components,such as the oxygen sensors and thethree way catalytic converter. Thesereplacements are not covered underwarranty.

Driving in Foreign Countries


０３／０９／０３　１２：１３：１４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２８４　



＊

＊

In Canada, Honda vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx) and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

Your vehicle has a PositiveCrankcase Ventilation System. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The Positive Crank-

case Ventilation valve routes themfrom the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on pages

and .204 206

Emissions Controls


The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

282

０３／０９／０３　１２：１３：２５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２８５　



The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,Ignition Timing Control, ExhaustGas Recirculation and Three WayCatalytic Converter. These foursystems work together to control theengine’s combustion and minimizethe amount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcomes out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI System uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: Air Intake,Engine Control, and Fuel Control.The Engine Control Module (ECM)or the Powertrain Control Module(PCM) uses various sensors todetermine how much air is goinginto the engine. It then controls howmuch fuel to inject under all operat-

ing conditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The Exhaust Gas Recirculation(EGR) system takes some of theexhaust gas and routes it back intothe intake manifold. Adding exhaustgas to the air/fuel mixture reducesthe amount of NOx produced whenthe fuel is burned.

The three way catalytic converter isin the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, it converts HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), dinitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to work to-gether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newHonda replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.

2

2

Emissions Controls

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter


０３／０９／０３　１２：１３：３８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２８６　



The three way catalytic convertercontains precious metals that serveas catalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converter is referred toas a three-way catalyst, since it actson HC, CO, and NOx. A replacementunit must be an original Honda partor its equivalent.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic converter ineffective.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

The three way catalytic convertermust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. It can set on fire any com-bustible materials that come near it.Park your vehicle away from highgrass, dry leaves, or other flamma-bles.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converter.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Three Way Catalytic Converter



THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

０３／０９／０３　１２：１３：４８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２８７　



Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 20° and95°F.

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle re-tested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for re-testingby doing the following.

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 8hours or more.

Keep the vehicle in Park(automatic transmission) orNeutral (manual transmission).Increase the engine speed to 2,000rpm and hold it there until thetemperature gauge rises to at least1/4 of the scale (approximately 3minutes).

CONTINUED

State Emissions Testing


Testing of Readiness Codes

285

０３／０９／０３　１２：１３：５７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２８８　



Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD (A/T) or 5th (M/T). Do not usethe cruise control. When trafficallows, drive for 90 secondswithout moving the acceleratorpedal. (Vehicle speed may varyslightly; this is okay.) If you cannotdo this for a continuous 90seconds because of trafficconditions, drive for at least 30seconds, then repeat it two moretimes (for a total of 90 seconds).

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour Honda dealer.

State Emissions Testing


０３／０９／０３　１２：１４：０４　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２８９　



....Customer Service Information . 288....................Warranty Coverages . 289

Reporting Safety Defects............................(U.S. Vehicle) . 290

.....................Authorized Manuals . 291

Warranty and Customer Relations

Warranty and Customer Relations 287

０３／０９／０３　１２：１４：０８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２９０　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


Honda dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. TheService Manager or GeneralManager can help. Almost allproblems are solved in this way.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Vehicle Identification Number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact your HondaCustomer Service Office.

272


Customer Service Information

288

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Automobile Customer ServiceMail Stop 500-2N-7A1919 Torrance BoulevardTorrance, California 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 999-1009

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816

San Juan, Puerto Rico 00919-0816

(787) 250-4318

０３／０９／０３　１２：１４：１８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２９１　



－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Your new Honda is covered by thesewarranties:

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from a Honda dealer.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’s emis-sions control systems. Time, mileage,and coverage are conditional. Pleaseread the warranty manual for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Honda Accessories are coveredunder this warranty. Time andmileage limits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

covers all Hondareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2004 Honda Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your Honda’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warranty infor-mation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2004 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages


U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

289

０３／０９／０３　１２：１４：３２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２９２　



If NHTSA receives similar com-plaints, it may open an investigation,and if it finds that a safety defectexists in a group of vehicles, it mayorder a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot becomeinvolved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, orAmerican Honda Motor Co., Inc.

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in additionto notifying Acura AutomobileDivision, American Honda Motor Co.,Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may eithercall the Auto Safety Hotline toll-freeat 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 inWashington D.C. area) or write to:NHTSA, U.S. Department ofTransportation, Washington,D.C. 20590. You can also obtainother information about motorvehicle safety from the Hotline.


Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

290

０３／０９／０３　１２：１４：３８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２９３　



＊

＊

＊

－

＊２００４

ＨＯＮ

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners shouldcontact their authorized Honda dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

291

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Form Description

2003-2004 Honda Accord 2/4 Door L4

Service Manual Base Book

2003-2004 Honda Accord 2/4 Door V6

Service Manual Supplement

2003-2004 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2003-2004 Honda 2/4 Door L4/V6

Body Repair Manual

2004 Honda Accord 4 Door L4/V6

Owner’s Manual

2004 Honda Accord 4 Door L4/V6

Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years-

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SDA04

61SDA05

61SDA04EL

61SDA30

31SDA610

31SDA710

31SDAQ10

HON-R

Price

Each

$70.00

$40.00

$50.00

$44.00

$34.00

$29.00

$12.00

FREE

2004 Honda Accord L4/V6 Navigation Manual

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurringobligation.

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

www. helminc. com

０３／０９／０３　１２：１４：５２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２９４　



－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

This manual complements the Service Manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

292

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

０３／０９／０３　１２：１５：０２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２９５　



CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 171ACCESSORY (Ignition Key

.......................................Position) . 82.............Accessory Power Socket . 107

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 215.....................................Airbag (SRS) . 9

..........Airbag System Components . 22............................Air Conditioning . 110

.........................................Usage . 115.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 239.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 280

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)................................Description . 189

...............................Indicator . 63, 190...................................Operation . 188

.Anti-theft Steering Column Lock . 82........Audio System . 122, 130, 132, 140

.............Automatic Speed Control . 155..............Automatic Transmission . 182

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 274.......................................Shifting . 182

.Shift Lever Position Indicator . 182................Shift Lever Positions . 182

....................Shift Lock Release . 185

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 260............................Jump Starting . 255

..............................Maintenance . 244............................Specifications . 275

..............................Before Driving . 163..........................................Belts, Seat . 8

.........................Beverage Holders . 107Brakes

...........Anti-lock System (ABS) . 189.............Break-in, New Linings . 164

....................Bulb Replacement . 233...........................................Fluid . 225

.......................................Parking . 104.........................System Indicator . 62

........................Wear Indicators . 188.............................Braking System . 188

........................Break-in, New Car . 164..Brightness Control, Instruments . 76

........................Brights, Headlights . 74Bulb Replacement

..............................Brake Lights . 233................Front Parking Lights . 231

.................................Headlights . 228.........High-mount Brake Light . 234

............................Specifications . 275...............................Trunk Light . 233

....................Turn Signal Lights . 231..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 228

............................Capacities Chart . 274.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

.............................Carrying Cargo . 173..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

...................................CD Changer . 132..............................CD Player . 130, 131

........................CD Pocket, Center . 106

........................Certification Label . 272............................................Chains . 243

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 249Changing Oil

........................................How to . 216.............................When to . 204, 206

...Charging System Indicator . 62, 260............Checklist, Before Driving . 178

Index

A B

C

I

０３／０９／０３　１２：１５：０８　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２９６　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


＊

..................Childproof Door Locks . 85.......................................Child Seats . 34

...........Lower Anchorage Points . 46..........Tether Anchorage Points . 50

..............Climate Control Sensors . 121.........................Clock, Setting the . 153

...................................Clutch Fluid . 226........................CO in the Exhaust . 282

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 179..............................Compact Spare . 248

.................Console Compartment . 107...............Consumer Information . 288

.............Controls, Instruments and . 59Coolant

........................................Adding . 219....................................Checking . 169

.........................Proper Solution . 219...................Temperature Gauge . 69

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 282

............Cruise Control Operation . 155.............Customer Service Office . 288

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii

.......................................Dashboard . 60................Daytime Running Lights . 76............Defects, Reporting Safety . 290

................Defogger, Rear Window . 77....................................Dimensions . 274

...............Dimming the Headlights . 74Dipstick

.Automatic Transmission . 221, 222..................................Engine Oil . 168

..........................Directional Signals . 74........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 188

.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 217Doors

..............Locking and Unlocking . 83..........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 277

Downshifting, 5-speed Manual.............................Transmission . 180

...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 5...........................................Driving . 177

....................................Economy . 170................In Foreign Countries . 281

..........Dual Temperature Control . 119..................Dust and Pollen Filter . 235

..............................Economy, Fuel . 170............Emergencies on the Road . 247.............Battery, Jump Starting . 255...........Brake System Indicator . 262

................Changing a Flat Tire . 249.....Charging System Indicator . 260

..................Checking the Fuses . 265.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 259...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 260...Manually Closing Moonroof . 263

..................Overheated Engine . 257.........................Emergency Brake . 103

......................Emergency Flashers . 76......................Emergency Towing . 264.......................Emissions Controls . 282

Engine....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 69

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 62, 260

........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 259

..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 214...............................Overheating . 257

............................Specifications . 274

....................Speed Limiter . 181, 184

Index

D

E

II

０３／０９／０３　１２：１５：１５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２９７　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


CONTINUED

...............Gas Mileage, Improving . 170..........................................Gasohol . 280.........................................Gasoline . 164...........................................Gauge . 70

................Octane Requirement . 164........................Tank, Filling the . 165

................Gas Station Procedures . 165Gauges

...Engine Coolant Temperature . 69...............................................Fuel . 70

...............................Speedometer . 68.................................Tachometer . 68

Gearshift Lever Positions..........Automatic Transmission . 182

5-speed Manual.........................Transmission . 180

......................................Glove Box . 108

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 228..............Hazard Warning Flashers . 76

........................................Headlights . 74........................................Aiming . 228

..............Automatic Lighting Off . 75............Daytime Running Lights . 76............Low Beams, Turning on . 74

.........................Reminder Chime . 74........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 228

...................................Turning on . 74..............................Head Restraints . 94

.....................Heating and Cooling . 110.................................Heated Mirror . 99

..........................Fan, Interior . 110, 111.........................................Features . 109

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 165Filter

.........................Dust and Pollen . 235...............................................Oil . 216

5-speed Manual Transmission...............Checking Fluid Level . 224

5-speed Manual Transmission................................Shifting the . 180

.............Flashers, Hazard Warning . 76...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 249

Fluids.Automatic Transmission . 221, 222

..........................................Brake . 225.........................................Clutch . 226

..............Manual Transmission . 224..........................Power Steering . 226

..................Windshield Washer . 218...........................Folding Rear Seat . 95

.....Foreign Countries, Driving in . 281..........................Four-way Flashers . 76

.................................................Fuel . 164......................Fill Door and Cap . 165

...........................................Gauge . 70................Octane Requirement . 164

...............................Oxygenated . 280........................Tank, Filling the . 165

.....................Fuses, Checking the . 265

.......................................Starting . 179..........Engine Speed Limiter . 181, 184

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 280.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 282

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 56Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 17

Index

F

G

H

III

０３／０９／０３　１２：１５：２３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２９８　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 158

.......................Hood, Opening the . 166...........................Hydraulic Clutch . 226

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 272Ignition

..............................................Keys . 79...........................................Switch . 82

............Timing Control System . 283........................Immobilizer System . 81

.........Important Safety Precautions . 6.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61

...............................Infant Restraint . 40......................................Infant Seats . 40

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 50...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 238

...................................Inside Mirror . 98.............................Inspection, Tire . 240

....................Installing a Child Seat . 45..........Tether Anchorage Points . 47

.............................Using LATCH . 46............................Instrument Panel . 61

........Instrument Panel Brightness . 76

........................................Introduction . i

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 250.......................................Jack, Tire . 250

................................Jump Starting . 255

..................................................Keys . 79

.......................Label, Certification . 272.................Lane Change, Signaling . 74

..................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 15, 19Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 228.......................................Indicator . 61

.........................................Parking . 74..................................Turn Signal . 65

......LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 82Locks

.......Anti-theft Steering Column . 82............................Fuel Fill Door . 165

..................................Glove Box . 108....................Lockout Prevention . 84

.................................Power Door . 83...........................................Trunk . 89

........................Low Coolant Level . 169...Lower Gear, Downshifting to a . 180

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 259...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 274

.........................................Luggage . 173

..................................Maintenance . 199...Owner Maintenance Checks . 203

........................................Record . 208......................Required Indicator . 70

..........................................Safety . 200.............................Schedule . 204-207

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 260...................Manual Transmission . 180

........Manual Transmission Fluid . 224...............................Meters, Gauges . 68

...................Methanol in Gasoline . 280..........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 98

.................................Modifications . 172

Index

I

J

K

L

M

IV

０３／０９／０３　１２：１５：３０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０２９９　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


CONTINUED

.......................................Moonroof . 102......................Closing Manually . 263

...................................Operation . 102

...................Neutral Gear Position . 183..................New Vehicle Break-in . 164

.....................Normal Shift Speeds . 181...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i

...............Numbers, Identification . 272

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 164.........................................Odometer . 68

Odometer/Outside Temperature......................................Indicator . 68

...............................Odometer, Trip . 69Oil

........................Change, How to . 216..............Change, When to . 204, 206......................Checking Engine . 168..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 259

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 215

...........ON (Ignition Key Position) . 82..Operation in Foreign Countries . 281

..............................Outside Mirrors . 98.....................Outside Temperature . 68

....................Overheating, Engine . 257.......Owner Maintenance Checks . 203

..........................Oxygenated Fuel . 280

..............Panel Brightness Control . 76........................Park Gear Position . 183

...............................Parking Brake . 103

.................................Parking Lights . 74..Parking Over Things that Burn . 284

..................................Parking Tips . 187.............................PGM-FI System . 283

...................................Pollen Filter . 235.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 17.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 11

...Additional Safety Precautions . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 17

........................Protecting Children . 34Protecting Infants and Small

.......................................Children . 40

...........Protecting Larger Children . 51.....................Using Booster Seat . 52

...................Radiator Overheating . 257Radio/CD Sound

.......................System . 122, 130, 132..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 233

..........................Rear Seat, Folding . 95............................Rear View Mirror . 98

.................Rear Window Defogger . 77.........Reclining the Seat Backs . 92, 93

.......Recommended Shift Speeds . 181.............................Reminder Lights . 61

.......................Remote Transmitter . 85Replacement Information

................Engine Oil and Filter . 216..........................................Fuses . 265

................................Light Bulbs . 228............................Schedule . 204, 206

...........................................Tires . 241.............................Wiper Blades . 236

Index

N

O

P

R

V

０３／０９／０３　１２：１５：３７　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０３００　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


＊

＊

Replacing Seat Belts After a............................................Crash . 21

.................Reserve Tank, Coolant . 219...............................Restraint, Child . 34

..................Reverse Gear Position . 183................................Rotation, Tire . 241

........................................Safety Belts . 8.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 290

.................................Safety Features . 7...........................................Airbags . 9

.......................................Seat Belts . 8.............Safety Labels, Location of . 57

...............................Safety Messages . ii................................Satellite Radio . 145

...........................................Seat Belts . 8...............Additional Information . 19

Automatic Seat Belt...............................Tensioners . 20

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 19................................Maintenance . 21

Reminder Light and................................Beeper . 19, 62

...................System Components . 19

...............Use During Pregnancy . 17......Wearing Lap/Shoulder Belt . 14

..................Seats, Adjusting the . 92, 93............................Security System . 154

.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 43...................Select/Reset Knob . 68, 69

...............................Serial Number . 272...................Service Intervals . 204, 206...........................Service Manual . 292

.........Service Station Procedures . 165..........................Setting the Clock . 153

.....Shift Lever Position Indicator . 182........................Shift Lock Release . 185

................................Side Airbags . 9, 27...How Your Side Airbags Work . 27

How The SIDE Airbag Off...........Indicator Light Works . 29

................Side Curtain Airbags . 10, 28How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 28...............................Signaling Turns . 74

.....................................Snow Tires . 242.......Sound System . 122, 130, 132, 140

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 248

............................Specifications . 276

....................Specifications Charts . 274................................Speed Control . 155........................Speed Limiter . 181, 184...................................Speedometer . 68

..........SRS, Additional Information . 22...Additional Safety Precautions . 33

How the Passenger Airbag Off...........Indicator Light Works . 31

How Your Airbags............................Work . 23, 27, 28

How Your SRS Indicator Light.......................................Works . 28

........................SRS Components . 22..................................SRS Service . 32

.............................SRS Indicator . 28, 63....START (Ignition Key Position) . 82

.......................Starting the Engine . 179................With a Dead Battery . 255

........Steam Coming from Engine . 257Steering Wheel

..................................Adjustment . 78.............Anti-theft Column Lock . 82

Stereo Sound...............System . 122, 130, 132, 140........................................Sun Visor . 104

........................Sunglasses Holder . 108

Index

S

VI

０３／０９／０３　１２：１５：４２　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０３０１　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


CONTINUED

Supplemental Restraint System......................................Servicing . 32

.........................SRS Indicator . 28, 63...................System Components . 22

..................................Synthetic Oil . 215

.....................................Tachometer . 68......Taillights, Changing Bulbs in . 233

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 247Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 277.....Emissions Control Systems . 282

.....................Oxygenated Fuels . 280Three Way Catalytic

...............................Converter . 284.......................Temperature Gauge . 69

..............Tether Anchorage Points . 50..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 284

..........................Time, Setting the . 153....................................Timing Belt . 227....................................Tire Chains . 243

.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 249.................................Tire Labeling . 279

...............................................Tires . 238..............................Air Pressure . 239

.........................Checking Wear . 240..........................Compact Spare . 248

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 277......................................Inflation . 238

..................................Inspection . 240...................................Replacing . 241

......................................Rotating . 241...........................................Snow . 242

............................Specifications . 276...................Tools, Tire Changing . 249

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 194

................Emergency Wrecker . 264..............Traction Control System . 191

...TCS Activation Indicator . 63, 192......................TCS Indicator . 64, 191

...............TCS ON/OFF Switch . 192Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,......................Automatic . 221, 222

Checking Fluid Level,...................................Manual . 224

..........Fluid Selection . 221, 223, 224..............Identification Number . 272

.............Shifting the Automatic . 182..................Shifting the Manual . 180

.....................................Treadwear . 277

.......................................Trip Meter . 69................................................Trunk . 89

....................Emergency Opener . 90.................................Opening the . 89

...................Open Monitor Light . 64....................................Turn Signals . 74

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 247

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 277........................Unleaded Gasoline . 164

.....................Upholstery Cleaning . 235.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 217

................................Vanity Mirror . 104.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 174

......................Vehicle Dimensions . 274

Index

T

U

V

VII

０３／０９／０３　１２：１５：５０　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０３０２　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


＊

＊

....Vehicle Identification Number . 272.............................Vehicle Storage . 246

.................................................VIN . 272..................................Viscosity, Oil . 215

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 57

..................Warranty Coverages . 289Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 218.....................................Operation . 73

Wheels...............Adjusting the Steering . 78............Alignment and Balance . 240

..........................Compact Spare . 248......................................Wrench . 251

Windows..................Operating the Power . 99

...........................Rear, Defogger . 77Windshield

.......................................Cleaning . 73

.......................................Washers . 73Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 236

.....................................Operation . 73....................................Worn Tires . 240

.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 264

: U.S. and Canada only

Index

W

VIII

０３／０９／０３　１２：１５：５５　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０３０３　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

5-speed Manual TransmissionFluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Brake Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

4.4 US qt (4.2 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

2.0 US qt (1.9 )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

29 psi (200 kPa , 2.0 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

17.09 US gal (64.7 )

Unleaded gasoline, pump octanenumber of 86 or higher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (seepages and ).

Honda Manual TransmissionFluid preferred, or an SAE 10W-30or 10W-40 motor oil as atemporary replacement (see page

).Capacity:

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

4-cylinder models

6-cylinder models

LXFront:

Rear:

All other modelsFront:

Rear:215

224221

224

226

225

０３／０９／０３　１２：１６：１３　３１ＳＤＡ６１０　０３０５　

Main Menu ▲ ▼


2004 accord 4 door online reference owner's manual...

Documents